You are on page 1of 353

Stoneridge Electronics Ltd

Combined Tachograph
Training Course

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 1

Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


COPYRIGHT
This training course and all material used and issued
throughout this course is the sole Copyright of Stoneridge
Electronics Ltd.

The information contained in this document is the Property of


Stoneridge Electronics Ltd. and should not be disclosed,
reproduced in whole or in part, or used under any condition by
anyone without the written authority of Stoneridge Electronics
Ltd.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 2
Course Daily Plan

ƒ Day 1 Tachograph History & Legislation,


Methods of Recording – Charts & Smartcards,
Calibration Methods, Senders & Cables,
Sealing and Plaques

ƒ Day 2 Mechanical & Electronic Circular Tachographs,


The MKII Tachograph Programmer

ƒ Day 3 Radio Sized Tachographs,


Visit to the Calibration Centre, Practical Tests

ƒ Day 4 The Digital Tachograph: Theory, Operation & Installation

ƒ Day 5 Digital Tachograph Decommissioning, Digital Course Summary,


Warranty

There will be an exam at the end of days 1, 2, 3 & 5


© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 3

Day 1

ƒ 8:45 Introduction, Health & ƒ 12:30 Calibration Methods &


Safety Information Understanding W, K &
L Factors
ƒ 9:00 Company Profile & ƒ 13:30 Senders & Cables
Course Outline
ƒ 14:30 Tea Break
ƒ 9:15 Tachograph History ƒ 14:45 Sealing & Plaques
ƒ 9:30 Tachograph Regulations ƒ 15:45 Questions?
ƒ 16:00 Exam – Written & Multiple
ƒ 10:00 Tea Break Choice

ƒ 10:15 Paper Charts ƒ 16:40 Finish

ƒ 11:30 Smartcards

ƒ 12:00 Lunch

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 4
Statement

This course has been written and created in conjunction


with the VOSA published document
‘The Approved Tachograph Centre Manual’

Please consult your copy of the VOSA manual

This is a VOSA approved training course

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 5

Section 1.1

Health & Safety

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 6
Health & Safety

ƒ In the event of the fire alarm sounding, personnel should leave the building
by the nearest practical exit, keeping traffic routes clear for emergency
services, and gather at assembly point 6 at the front of the building

ƒ DO NOT STOP TO TAKE POSSESSIONS WITH YOU OR GO BACK FOR THEM

ƒ DO NOT RE-ENTER THE BUILDING UNTIL INSTRUCTED BY THE EVACUATION


COORDINATOR OR HIS DEPUTY

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 7

Health & Safety

ASSEM BLY AREAS

1 2 3 4 5 6

Assemble
CAR PARKING

Here

CAR PARKING

CAR PARKING FIRE ROAD

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 8
Health & Safety

ƒ This is a no smoking facility

ƒ Smoking is only permitted in the designated area at the side of the facility

ƒ Please ensure that mobile phones and all other electronic devices are
switched off at all times

ƒ Lunch, Coffee & Tea are provided free of charge in the Canteen

ƒ Toilet Facilities are at the front end of the building

ƒ High Visibility Vests must be worn during the rolling road site visit

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 9

Section 1.2

Company Profile

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 10
Stoneridge
Warren, OH, USA

Stoneridge Sales Finance

Stoneridge Pollak
Alphabet Actuator/Sensor Products
Electronics Group Switch Products

Warren, OH Stoneridge Electronics Canton, MA Pollak Actuators - Boston, MA


- Stockholm, Sweden
Chihuahua, - Örebro, Sweden Juarez, Mexico Hi-Stat - Lexington, OH
Mexico - Tallinn, Estonia
- Dundee, Scotland, UK Cheltenham,
Monclova, Hi-Stat Sensors
England, UK
Mexico Pollak Electronics - Sarasota, FL
- El Paso, TX - Lexington, OH
- Juarez, Mexico

PST Electrônica (1)


- Campinas, Brazil
(1) – 50% Ownership - Manaus, Brazil
(2) – 20% Ownership
Minda/Stoneridge (2) China Representative Office
-Pune, India

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 11

Stoneridge Electronics Locations

Bromma, Sweden
Dundee, Scotland Örebro, Sweden
Tallinn, Estonia

Sales & Support:

Stuttgart, Germany
Frankfurt, Germany
Nuremberg, Germany
Madrid, Spain
Paris, France
Bayonne, France
Rome, Italy

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 12
UK – Design, Manufacture & Sales

• Dundee
• 100+ employees
• 7400 m²

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 13

Overview Stoneridge Electronics Products

ƒ Instrument Clusters

ƒ Tachographs

ƒ Multiplex Systems

ƒ Power Distribution Centre

ƒ ECU’s

ƒ Telematics Systems

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 14
Stoneridge Electronics Customers

Bus
Trucks Scania
Scania Volvo Off Road
DAF EvoBus VCE
Daimler Chrysler Jonckheere Same Deutz-Fahr
Volvo Plaxton Case New Holland
MAN IRISBus
Renault
Hino
Nissan Light Vehicles
Isuzu Ford Peugeot
Mitsubishi Renault Citroen
Mazda Landrover
Mercedes Nissan
Fiat Volkswagen
Hummer LDV
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 15

Section 1.3

Tachograph Introduction & History

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 16
Tachograph Introduction – What is a Tachograph?

ƒ A Tachograph is an instrument that is fitted in a vehicle and which displays


speed, time and distance visually to a driver in the same way that a
speedometer and dashboard clock would do

ƒ It records the above parameters, and the driver’s duty mode for the vehicle
driver and, if the vehicle is double-manned, the co-driver’s duty mode

ƒ The Tachograph recordings are made either on a wax coated paper chart, or
a smart card, that is inserted at the start of a working day and removed only
at the end of the working day unless the driver changes vehicles

ƒ It is a legal requirement to have a Tachograph chart fitted or Driver


smartcard inserted, depending on vehicle Tachograph type, whilst driving a
non-exempt vehicle

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 17

Tachograph Introduction - Why is a Tachograph Required?

ƒ All EU member countries must adhere to EU legislation

ƒ Under the latest EU Tachograph legislation, all vehicles that are used for
commercial purposes and have a maximum permissible weight of greater
than 3.5 tonnes and all vehicles that are used for non-commercial
purposes and have a maximum permissible weight of greater than 7.5
tonnes must have a Tachograph installed

ƒ Tachographs must also be fitted to passenger carrying vehicles that either


are used for commercial journeys and have more than 9 seats, or are
used for non-commercial journeys and have more than 17 seats

ƒ There are a number of examples of vehicles that are exempt to these


rules as listed in sub-section 3.4 of the supplementary Training manual.
The legislation also defines the specification that any type approved
Tachograph must meet

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 18
Tachograph History - General

ƒ The first record of a Tachograph appears to be around 1911 when a model


known as the Jones Recorder was marketed by an English company Markt &
Co. London Ltd. The instrument owed a marked similarity to modern
equivalents in that it used a circular chart, upon which it recorded time,
movement and distance in half-mile zig-zags, over a 24 Hour period

ƒ More than 10 years later a less refined instrument was introduced in


Germany which had a vibrating stylus that operated with vehicle movement,
causing a trace to be drawn on a chart. Although these instruments were
used by some truck owners to achieve more profitable use of their vehicles,
largely there was little demand and device development stagnated. During
the late 1930’s and early 1940’s the devices were used more extensively as
an aid to conserving fuel by monitoring vehicle movement

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 19

Tachograph History - General

ƒ The first ever Tachograph legislation was introduced in Germany in 1952


ƒ The legislation applied to all vehicles over 9.5 tonnes
ƒ Due to a significant drop in accidents by the 1960’s, the Tachograph legislation
was then applied to all vehicles over 3.5 tonnes in weight, and to all public
service and passenger carrying vehicles with at least nine seats
ƒ In the UK no Tachograph legislation was applicable until the UK joined the EEC
on 1st, January 1973, although initially the legislation was not adhered to
ƒ UK agreed on 14th, January 1980 to introduce the EEC Tachograph legislation
in force at that time, regulation 543/69 on driver’s hours and regulation
1463/70 on the recording equipment, the Tachograph
ƒ A two year UK retrofit programme was carried out to have tachographs fitted
to most goods vehicles of over 3.5 tonnes and most passenger vehicles at that
time with more than 17 seats, more than 9 seats for international journeys
ƒ The programme ended at midnight on 31st, December 1981, and thereafter it
became mandatory to fit a Tachograph to all non-exempt UK vehicles

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 20
Tachograph History - Standard & Automatic Tachographs

ƒ Mechanical Tachographs, Veeder-Root 1100 series, and the early circular


Electronic Tachographs, Veeder-Root 1200 and 1400 series, can be further
divided into two categories namely Standard and Automatic versions

ƒ The name ‘Standard’ refers to a Tachograph which requires manual switching


of the driver’s duty knob between all four duties, i.e. drive (), work (),
available () and rest (). An ‘Automatic’ Tachograph is one that
automatically records ‘drive’ duty mode whenever a vehicle moves

ƒ All modern Veeder-Root analogue Tachographs, 8300, 8400 and 2400, and
all Digital Tachographs automatically select ‘drive’ duty mode when a vehicle
moves regardless of which position the duty switch is set to

ƒ For the Automatic versions of the older style Tachographs i.e. 1100
Mechanical Tachographs, and 1200 and 1400 Electronic Tachographs, the
duty switch has to be manually set to available () before driving or ‘drive’
duty mode is not recorded properly

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 21

Tachograph History – Mechanical Tachograph

ƒ The first type of Tachograph introduced by


Veeder-Root was in the 1970’s and was the 1100
series Mechanical Tachograph

ƒ This was similar in design to existing mechanical


drive circular speedometers of that time

ƒ The 1100 Tachograph utilises a mechanical


flexible rotating shaft drive cable, that is
connected between the gearbox rotating shaft
output and the rear of the Tachograph, to drive
the mechanical speed and distance measuring
systems within the instrument

ƒ An electrical supply to the Tachograph is


required, but only to power the clock and the
lamps
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 22
Tachograph History – Electronic Tachograph

ƒ An Electronic Tachograph was first introduced


by Veeder-Root in the early 1980’s and was the
1200 series. This was superseded by the more
advanced 1400 series Tachograph in early 1984

ƒ The 1200/1400 exterior design was very similar


to 1100 Mechanical Tachographs

ƒ The 1200/1400 Tachograph eliminates the need


for a mechanical flexible rotating shaft gearbox
drive cable and instead uses an electronic
gearbox motion sensor and electric cable to
connect to the gearbox output

ƒ Microprocessor technology was used for the


internal speed and distance measuring systems
within the instrument

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 23

Tachograph History – Advanced Circular Electronic Models

ƒ In 1987 the 8300 Tachograph was introduced


and used a microcontroller to perform the
basic measurement, calculation and control
functions
ƒ The 8300 Tachograph was the first Veeder-
root Tachograph to utilise the four 8-way Amp
mini-timer rear connectors that have since
become the industry standard
ƒ In 1991 the 8400 series Tachograph was
introduced. It is visually and dimensionally
identical to the 8300 Tachograph but uses
more modern electronics
ƒ The 8400 has electronically programmable
engine rev bands, overspeed, ignition-on-
record and pulses-per-rev settings
ƒ The 8300 and 8400 Tachographs are
automatic in terms of ‘drive’ recording
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 24
Tachograph History – Radio Sized Electronic Tachographs

ƒ The 2400 series Veeder-root Tachograph


was introduced in 1999
ƒ 2400 tachographs fit inside a standard
ISO7736 radio enclosure allowing for an
integrated cluster in the vehicle
ƒ A 2400 can be driven from an 8-pulse
sender, but unlike older tachographs it can
also accept speed pulses from an
encrypted sender, type KITAS 1. This
device provides the Tachograph with a
secure speed signal that cannot be
tampered with without the tachograph
sensing and memorising the event
ƒ The 2400 was designed to function under
CANbus and/or K-line control
ƒ It also has a real time clock with a 10 year
battery life
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 25

Tachograph History – Digital Tachographs

ƒ The Digital Tachograph was first


introduced by Stoneridge in 2005 in the
form of the SE5000
ƒ The SE5000 Digital Tachograph is
designed to fit inside a standard ISO7736
radio enclosure
ƒ The SE5000 can only be driven from a
gearbox motion sensor device known as
an encrypted sender, type KITAS 2
ƒ The SE5000 was designed to comply with
regulation 1360/2002 and thus displays
and records, in a digital format, speed,
distance and driver duties in internal
memory and duties on a driver smartcard
ƒ The EU type approval number for the
SE5000 Tachograph is e5 0002
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 26
Section 1.4

Tachograph Regulations

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 27

Tachograph Regulations – Recording Equipment

ƒ The UK joined the European Economic Community (EEC) on the 1st January
1973 and the legislation on Tachograph Recording Equipment in force at that
time was Council Regulation (EEC) No. 1463/70

ƒ Due to political and economic reasons the UK did not implement this EEC
legislation for a number of years and instead continued to only enforce the
UK Transport Act of 1968 which required drivers to complete log books of
driving time

ƒ Following European legal proceedings, on the 14th January 1980 the UK


agreed to adhere to EU Tachograph legislation and a 2-year retrofit
programme to fit Tachographs compliant with EU Recording Equipment
legislation in force at that time i.e. Council Regulation (EEC) No. 1463/70.
The programme ended at midnight on 31st, December 1981, and thereafter
it became mandatory to fit a Tachograph to all non-exempt UK vehicles

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 28
Tachograph Regulations – Recording Equipment

ƒ In 1985 new EU Tachograph Recording Equipment legislation was issued in


the form of Council Regulation (EEC) No. 3821/85. This legislation, which is
commonly known as ‘Annex 1’ is the basis for all modern Analogue
Tachographs that are currently available on the market e.g. 8400/2400 etc

ƒ Subsequently there were various amendments to the Annex 1 legislation in


the form of Commission Regulations (EC) 3314/90, 3688/92, 2479/95 and
1056/97. These amendments are regarding new chart marking requirements
for equipment power disconnection and for speed sensor signal failure, for
the requirement for armoured speed sensor cable fitting, for the introduction
of speed sensor signal encryption and for the fitting of armoured cable into
small vehicles respectively

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 29

Tachograph Regulations – Digital Tachograph

ƒ The ‘Annex 1B’ Digital Tachograph was first announced in Council Regulation
(EC) No. 2135/98. However it was not until the 5th August 2002 that the
final Annex 1B Technical Specification publication was made in the form of
Commission Regulation (EC) No. 1360/2002
ƒ In March 2004 Commission Regulation (EC) no. 432/2004 was introduced
and this contained some amendments to the technical specifications
ƒ The original Annex 1B legislation stated that Digital Tachographs must be
fitted to all vehicles registered new as from 2 years after the publication of
the Annex 1B specification, i.e. from 5th August 2004. However no
manufacturer gained type approval for a Digital Tachograph system within
the required 12 month period from the date of Annex 1B publication, i.e. by
5th August 2003. Thus on 21st April 2004 the EU commission announced a
moratorium to extend the deadline for the mandatory introduction of the
Digital Tachograph for a period of 12 months and thus the new date of
introduction would be from the 5th August 2005

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 30
Tachograph Regulations – Digital Tachograph

ƒ On the 12th of August 2005 the EU commission made an announcement that


it had decided to grant a final period of tolerance for the mandatory
introduction of Digital Tachographs until 31st December 2005. It was also
stated that all member states must legally recognise and accept Digital
Tachograph fitment as an option from then on. Thus the initial non-
compulsory fitment of Digital Tachographs in the UK began in late summer
of 2005

ƒ Finally in April 2006, Council Regulation (EC) No 561/2006 was published


and this stated that Digital Tachograph fitment was mandatory for all non-
exempt vehicles registered on or after 1st May 2006

ƒ Non-exempt vehicles registered on or before 30th April 2006 can be fitted


with either a Digital Tachograph or Analogue Tachograph at the customers
request

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 31

Tachograph Regulations – Drivers’ Hours Laws

ƒ When the UK joined the European Economic Community (EEC) on the 1st
January 1973 the legislation on Tachograph Drivers Hours Laws in force at
that time was Council Regulation (EEC) No. 543/69

ƒ In 1985 a new set of EU Drivers’ Hours Laws was issued in the form of
Council Regulation (EEC) No. 3820/85 and these Laws were applicable for
the next 20 plus years

ƒ However, Council Regulation (EC) No 561/2006 repealed and replaced


3820/85 from the 11th of April 2007 onwards and hence drivers had to
adhere to an amended set of Hours Laws from that date forward

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 32
Tachograph Regulations – Drivers’ Hours Laws

ƒ Under Council Regulation (EC) No 561/2006 drivers must comply with the
Drivers’ Hours requirements that are listed over if they are driving:

• Vehicles that are used to carry passengers commercially and have


more than 9 seats,

• Vehicles that are used to carry passengers non-commercially and


have more than 17 seats,

• Commercially used goods vehicles that have a maximum


permissible weight of greater than 3.5 tonnes

• Non-commercially used goods vehicles that have a maximum


permissible weight of greater than 7.5 tonnes

ƒ Note: maximum permissible means the maximum authorised operating


weight when fully laden including a trailer or a semi-trailer

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 33

Tachograph Regulations – Drivers’ Hours Laws

ƒ The above requirements apply whether on National (i.e. within the UK) or
International journeys (i.e. to Republic of Ireland or to E.U. Countries)

ƒ There are however, a number of examples of vehicles that are exempt to


these rules as listed in sub-section 3.4 of the supplementary Training
Manual and this list includes vehicles undergoing road tests for technical
development, repair or maintenance purposes, and new or rebuilt
vehicles which have not yet been put into service

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 34
Tachograph Regulations – Driving Limits

ƒ Continuous Driving – the maximum period of continuous or cumulative driving


allowed, before a 45 minute break is required, is 4 Hours 30 minutes

ƒ Daily Driving – this is defined as the total time spent driving between two
consecutive daily rest periods or between a daily rest and a weekly rest
period or vice-versa. Daily driving is limited to a maximum of 9 Hours,
although this may be extended to 10 Hours two times per week

ƒ Weekly Driving Limit – this is defined as the total time spent driving during a
week, i.e. 00:00 Monday to 24:00 Sunday, and is limited to a maximum of 56
Hours. Note: under Council Directive 2002/15/EC the average weekly
working time over a four month period may not exceed 48 Hours and any
individual working week must never exceed 60 Hours

ƒ Two Weekly Driving – The total accumulated driving time during any two
consecutive weeks is limited to a maximum of 90 Hours

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 35

Tachograph Regulations – Breaks & Rest Periods

ƒ Breaks while Driving – once the allowed limit of 4 hours 30 minutes of


continuous or cumulative driving has been reached, a driver must take a
break of a minimum of 45 minutes. This break may be replaced by a break
of at least 15 minutes followed by a break of at least 30 minutes. Each
break must be taken either during or after the 4hour 30min driving period.
The total cumulative driving must never exceed the 4hour 30min limit
NOTE: The European Court of Justice has ruled that after a total of 45
minutes break has been taken, a new 4hour 30min driving period can begin

ƒ Daily Rest – in each period of 24 hours after the end of a previous Daily
Rest or Weekly Rest period, a driver must have taken a rest period of at
least 11 consecutive hours to form a Regular Daily Rest period. However
this may be reduced to 9 hours to form a Reduced Daily Rest period.
Between any two weekly rest periods a driver may have at most 3 Reduced
Daily Rest periods

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 36
Tachograph Regulations – Breaks & Rest Periods

ƒ Alternative Daily Rest – An Alternative Regular Daily Rest period consists


of firstly an uninterrupted period of at least 3 hours followed by an
uninterrupted period of at least 9 hours

ƒ Interrupted Daily Rest – When a driver accompanies a vehicle that is


being transported by ferryboat or a train and takes a Regular Daily Rest
period, that period may be interrupted not more than twice by other
activities that do not exceed one hour in total. During the Regular Daily
Rest period, the driver must have access to a bunk or couchette

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 37

Tachograph Regulations – Breaks & Rest Periods

ƒ Weekly Rest – in the course of a week, i.e. Monday 00:00 hours to 24:00
hours the following Sunday, one of the Daily Rest periods must be
extended to a total of at least 45 consecutive hours to form a Regular
Weekly Rest period. A Weekly Rest period shall start no later than at the
end of six 24 hour periods from the end of the previous Weekly Rest
period. A Weekly Rest period that falls in 2 weeks may be counted in
either, but not in both

ƒ Reduced Weekly Rest – only once in any 2 week period a Regular Weekly
Rest period may be reduced to at least 24 consecutive hours to form a
Reduced Weekly Rest period

ƒ Rest Compensation – any reduction in a Regular Weekly Rest period must


be compensated by an equivalent period of rest taken en bloc before the
end of the third week after the week in which the Weekly Rest was first
reduced. Any rest compensation periods must be added onto another
rest period of at least 9 hours

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 38
Tachograph Regulations – Breaks & Rest Periods

ƒ When a vehicle is manned by at least two drivers the rules listed above still
apply. However during the period of 30 hours from the end of a previous
Daily Rest or Weekly Rest period all drivers engaged in multi-manning must
have taken a Daily Rest period of at least 9 consecutive hours. All drivers
must take the rest period at the same time and if the rest period is to be
taken in the vehicle, it must be stationary and all drivers must have a bunk

ƒ With the exception of the first hour of multi-man driving, if for any reason a
driver is left on his own whilst driving the vehicle, at any time, then single
manning rules will apply for the whole day

ƒ With a daily rest period of 9 Hours in a 30 Hour period, this means that
multi-manning drivers can be on duty for a maximum of 21 consecutive
hours, however normal driving limits still apply, i.e., 9 Hours normally,
extendable to 10 Hours on two days in a week

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 39

Tachograph Regulations – Other 561/2006 Changes

ƒ From the 1st of January 2008, Drivers must have available for inspection,
whilst present and on duty in an ‘In-scope’ vehicle, any Tachograph charts
and Digital Printouts from the current day and from the previous 28
calendar days

ƒ Drivers must correctly operate Tachograph duty mode switches for


recording periods or work () and availability ()

ƒ Any commercial Out of Scope Driving done in a vehicle without a


Tachograph must be recorded as Other Work ()

ƒ Any driving of an Out of Scope vehicle without a Tachograph, to or from a


vehicle which is in Scope and away from base must also be recorded as
Other Work ()

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 40
Tachograph Regulations – VOSA

ƒ The Vehicle and Operator Services Agency, VOSA, was formed in 2003
following a merger of the Vehicle Inspectorate, VI, and the Traffic Area
Network, TAN, divisor of the UK government Department for Transport, DFT

ƒ The aims of VOSA are to contribute to the improvement of road safety and
environmental standards, and to the reduction of vehicle crime

ƒ VOSA are the government body responsible for enforcing all drivers’ hours
and Tachograph legislation, including the fitment and calibration of
Tachograph systems

ƒ The limits of accuracy for speed, distance and time, both visually and
recorded, are summarised below and are as listed in Council Regulations
(EEC) 3821/85 for Analogue Tachographs, 1360/2002 for Digital
Tachographs and in the VOSA Approved Tachograph Centre Manual for both
Analogue and Digital systems

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 41

Tachograph Regulations – Tachograph Tolerances

ƒ The tolerances for a Bench Test of an Analogue Tachograph at Initial or


6 Yearly Inspection, also for 2 Yearly Inspection for Centres using non-
roller test equipment i.e. a Tachograph portable drive test unit, are as
follows,

• Distance Travelled: ±1%, where that distance is at least 1km


• Speed: ±3 km/h
• Time: ±10 minutes per 7 days, or ±2 minutes per day if clock
cannot run for 7 days continuously

ƒ The tolerances for a Bench Test of a Digital Tachograph VU at Initial or 2


Yearly Inspection are as follows,

• Distance Travelled: ±1%, where that distance is at least 1km


• Speed: ±1 km/h
• Time: Not Applicable
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 42
Tachograph Regulations – Tachograph Tolerances

ƒ The tolerances for an Installed Analogue Tachograph system at the Initial


calibration stage are as follows,

• Distance Travelled: ±2%, where that distance is at least 1km


• Speed: ±4 km/h
• Time: ±10 minutes per 7 days, or ±2 minutes per day if clock
cannot run for 7 days continuously

ƒ The tolerances for an Installed Digital Tachograph at the Initial or 2


Yearly Inspection calibration stage are as follows,

• Distance Travelled: ±2%, where that distance is at least 1km


• Speed: ±2 km/h
• Time: Not Applicable

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 43

Tachograph Regulations – Tachograph Tolerances

ƒ The tolerances for an Installed Analogue Tachograph system that is In


Use, including as part of the 2-Year or 6-Year Inspections, are as follows,

• Distance Travelled: ±4%, where that distance is at least 1km


• Speed: ±6 km/h
• Time: ±10 minutes per 7 days, or ±2 minutes per day if clock
cannot run for 7 days continuously

ƒ The tolerances for an Installed Digital Tachograph system that is In Use,


i.e. when carrying out a post installation Vehicle-Tachograph speed-for-
speed check, are as follows,

• Distance Travelled: ±4%, where that distance is at least 1km


• Speed: ±6 km/h
• Time: Not Applicable

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 44
Section 1.5

Analogue Tachograph Charts

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 45

Charts - Introduction

ƒ A Tachograph chart is a circular disc of specially prepared paper that is


covered on one side with fine layers of special wax. The top layer is white
and overprinted with the various graduation lines for the chart recordings
and the bottom layer is black
ƒ Pressure from the Tachograph stylus causes the top white layer of wax to
be displaced allowing the black layer to show through. In this way a
permanent unalterable mark is left on the chart

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 46
Charts - Introduction

ƒ All EU approved Tachographs must use a chart that is graduated into 24-hour
sections, this is known as a one-day Chart. The hour sections are marked in
circular scales on the outer rim of the chart and also approximately half way
towards the centre of the chart
ƒ Early Veeder-root Tachographs, 1100 Mechanical and 1200 & 1400 Electronic,
used a type of chart that has three mounting holes and is thus commonly
known as a ‘3-hole’ one-day chart
ƒ 8300, 8400 and 2400, and all other analogue Tachographs use a different
type of chart that has a single pear-shaped mounting hole which is commonly
known as a ‘pear-hole’ one-day chart
ƒ Charts are available with different speed ranges for use in different types of
Tachograph. When fitting a chart into a Tachograph, it is essential that the
chart being fitted is approved for use in the Tachograph in which it is being
inserted. On the chart rear, there is a list of EU approval numbers which
highlight the Tachograph types in which the chart can be legally used
ƒ A Tachograph approval number can be determined from the manufacturers’
descriptive label that is fitted either on or inside the Tachograph

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 47

Charts – 3 Hole Charts – Description

ƒ There are four sections into which a chart is subdivided

• Activity Mode, Speed, Distance, Centrefield

24 Hour Markings Activity Mode

Speed

Distance

Centre Field

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 48
Charts – 3 Hole Charts – Activity Mode Traces

ƒ The activity of the driver, or the crew when a chart is fitted as a second
chart in a two-man vehicle, is recorded in the activity mode area of the
chart. A 3-hole chart has four bands in the activity mode area of the chart
to record driver activity. These are drive, used when driving, work used
when actively working, available, used when on duty but not actively
working and rest, used when on a break or resting

Driving  – Thick Trace at outside

Work  – Thin trace in middle

Available  – Thin trace at outside

Rest  – Thin trace at the bottom

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 49

Charts – 3 Hole Charts – Speed and Distance

Speed Trace Distance Trace ‘V’ = 10km Travelled

Speed Lines

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 50
Charts – 3 Hole Charts – Centre Field Information

ƒ It is a legal requirement that before driving a driver must insert a chart with
certain centrefield information completed, i.e. Name, Start Location, VRN,
Date for start of duty and Odometer reading at the start of the journey
Driver Name

Location at Start

Location at Finish

Vehicle Registration Number (VRN)


Date at Start
Date at Finish
Odometer at Finish
Odometer at Start
Distance Travelled

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 51

Charts – 3 Hole Charts – Reverse Side

Manual Entries

Chart and Tachograph EU


Approval Numbers, Always
Check compatibility

Additional Changes of Vehicle

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 52
Charts – 3 Hole Charts – Reverse Side

ƒ If a driver changes vehicle during the course of a working day they may enter
the new vehicle details on the rear of the chart and may do this for up to
three vehicle changes for a 3-hole chart. The vehicle information that must
be entered for each vehicle change is
• The vehicle registration number
• The time of the change of vehicle
• The new vehicle odometer reading at the time of the vehicle change
• The odometer reading at the end of the journey and distance
travelled during journey

ƒ Also included on the rear of the chart are the EU type approval ‘e’ numbers.
Firstly the approval number of the chart itself and secondly the approval
numbers of the types of Tachograph in which the chart can legally be used.
A Tachograph approval number can be determined from the manufacturers’
descriptive label that is fitted either on or inside the Tachograph

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 53

Charts – 3 Hole Charts – Reverse Side

ƒ Finally on the rear of the chart, there is a 24 hour marked band around the
inner area of the chart that is reserved for driver manual entries. This area
allows a driver to make a record of any duties carried out whilst their
Tachograph chart was not fitted into a Tachograph, i.e. away from vehicle

ƒ The manual entries area may also be used to record duties carried out whilst
a chart is fitted into a faulty Tachograph. It should be noted that a faulty
Tachograph should be repaired as soon as is possible, and within 7 days if
away from base

ƒ A vehicle must not be driven from base with a faulty Tachograph fitted

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 54
Charts – Pear Hole Charts – Description

ƒ Pear hole charts are detailed below. There are two 24 Hour time scales
which are standard to all one-day charts, subsections for speed, 4th
trace/events recording, activity mode, distance and centrefield

ƒ The main differences from 3-hole charts, are that for pear hole charts the
speed trace is recorded on the outer band of the chart and also there is a
band set aside for 4th trace/events recording

24 Hour Markings Speed Trace

4th Stylus/Events

Activity Mode

Distance Trace

Centre Field

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 55

Charts – Pear Hole Charts – Activity Mode Traces

ƒ The activity of the driver, or the crew when a chart is fitted as a second chart
in a two-man vehicle, is recorded in the activity mode area of the chart. A
pear hole chart has four bands in the activity mode area of the chart to
record driver activity. These are drive (used when driving), work (used when
actively working), available (used when on duty but not actively working) and
rest (used when on a break or resting)

Available  – 25% Full trace

Driving  – Full Trace

Work  – 75% Full trace

Rest  – Single line trace

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 56
Charts – Pear Hole Charts – Speed

ƒ The speed trace is recorded in exactly the same way as for a 3-hole chart.
However the actual positioning of the speed trace is on the outside band for a
pear hole chart
ƒ For ‘pear-hole’ charts, there are three speed ranges commonly in use in the
EU, namely 125 km/h, 140 km/h and 180 km/h
ƒ Care must be taken when fitting a chart that it is the correct type for the
Tachograph in which it is being inserted

Speed Trace

Speed Lines

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 57

Charts – Pear Hole Charts – Distance & Centre Field Details

ƒ The distance trace on a pear hole chart is recorded in the same position
and has the same meanings as that for the 3-hole chart as described
previously

ƒ As for the 3-hole chart described previously, a pear hole chart centrefield
is in the centre portion of the chart and the driver and vehicle information
that can be recorded is exactly the same for 3-hole and pear-hole chart
versions

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 58
Charts – Pear Hole Charts – Fourth Trace Recording

ƒ A pear hole chart has an area set aside for 4th trace revs/event recordings
which is between the driver activity and speed trace recording areas. A
special 4th trace Tachograph is required for these recordings to be possible

ƒ The fourth stylus can be used as an event recorder, indicating the absence or
presence of one or two events. These events may occur singly or together

ƒ This can be very useful to the fleet operator, where an electrical switch can
be fitted and power supplied to the event input when a function is operated

ƒ The fourth stylus can also be used to record Engine Revs information. This
information can be of particular interest to vehicle owners, with the engine
revs recorded in bands which can be set either with switches or via an
electronic programmer depending on the Tachograph type

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 59

Charts – Pear Hole Charts – Fourth Trace Recording

ƒ The engine revs bands are low power, economy and poor economy. The 4th
trace engine rev height recorded is dependant on which band the engine revs
fall into, i.e. less than low power – negative 25% trace, within low power to
economy setting – positive 25% trace, within economy to poor economy –
positive 75% trace, more than poor economy full height trace

ƒ The 4th stylus can also be used to record ‘out of scope’, or ‘off-road’ driving –
but again a special ‘off-road’ Tachograph must be used

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 60
Charts – Pear Hole Charts – Reverse Side

Manual Entries

Chart and Tachograph EU


Approval Numbers, Always
Check Compatibility

Additional Changes of Vehicle

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 61

Charts – Pear Hole Charts – Reverse Side

ƒ The reverse side of a pear hole chart has an area set aside for recording
up to 3 vehicle changes

ƒ There is an area for the EU type approval ‘e’ numbers for both the chart
and the types of Tachograph in which the chart can be legally used. A
chart must always be checked for compatibility with the Tachograph type
in which it is about to be used

ƒ Finally there is also a 24 hour marked band around the inner area of the
chart for recording manual activity entries in exactly the same way as was
previously explained

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 62
Charts – Tachograph Chart Usage

ƒ A Tachograph chart is a record of driver or crew-members own work. If a


driver and crew-member change places during their shift, their charts must
also change places so that the new driver can record speed and distance on
their chart

ƒ If the driver or crew-member transfers to another vehicle during their shift


they must take their chart with them. Details of the new vehicle and
changeover time should be entered on the rear of the chart

ƒ If the Tachograph in the new vehicle is not compatible with the chart from
the first vehicle, a new chart to suit the new Tachograph type must be made
out, entering on it the vehicle details and the time of changeover

ƒ The first chart must be retained as part of the complete record of duty for
the shift

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 63

Charts – Tachograph Chart Usage

ƒ If part of a shift is done in a vehicle fitted with a Digital Tachograph all


records of driving that vehicle must be recorded on the driver’s own personal
driver smartcard

ƒ Driver card printouts are not legally required, but a driver may take a daily
drive printout and store it with any paper charts produced over the rest of
the shift via non-digital Tachographs

ƒ In the event of the Tachograph instrument breaking down during a journey,


a driver can mark the details of his shift work on the wax side of the chart or
in the Manual Entries area provided on the reverse side

ƒ A vehicle which is unable to return to base within 7 days of a Tachograph


defect occurring, must have the fault repaired en route

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 64
Section 1.6

Digital Tachograph Smartcards

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 65

The Driver Card

ƒ White in colour

ƒ Valid for 5 years

ƒ Personal to the driver

ƒ Data can be manually entered via


a VU

ƒ Can store 28 days of typical driver


activity

ƒ A typical day is defined as 93 duty


changes per day

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 66
Driver Responsibilities

ƒ Must obtain a Driver Card prior to driving a vehicle fitted with a Digital
Tachograph

ƒ Retain the card for their personal use – a card is not transferable

ƒ Get printouts as required, e.g. before starting driving in a vehicle not fitted
with a Digital Tachograph VU

ƒ Report a lost, stolen or faulty card to DVLA within 7 days – a replacement


card after loss can be collected from any nominated VOSA test station

ƒ Printouts should be taken during the time the card is lost, stolen or faulty.
This can be for a period of a maximum of 15 days. At least one complete
spare paper roll must be carried at all times

ƒ A driver must learn to operate the VU correctly

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 67

The Workshop Card

ƒ Red in colour, valid for one year. In


UK expires 31st March. Will not be
re-issued if training certificate details
held by VOSA are out of date
ƒ Workshop may only hold one card
per technician
ƒ PIN issued to technician, card to
workshop

ƒ Card self-locks after 5 consecutive incorrect PIN entries


ƒ Card/PIN must NEVER be used by anyone other than the named technician
on the card
ƒ Card lost, or PIN forgotten, means new Card and PIN
ƒ Enables activation, calibration parameter programming and data
downloading
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 68
Workshop Responsibilities

ƒ Obtain approval from relevant authorities


• Arrange approved training and Workshop cards for technicians

ƒ Carry out full VU installation procedures

ƒ Carry out VU Inspections e.g. 2 yearly – must use own paper for
calibration printouts etc

ƒ Decommission unserviceable VUs & Return data to “owner”

ƒ A technician must use a ‘Driver’ card for all driving out with a Road test,
which is not covered under legislation

ƒ Workshop cards not being used MUST be securely stored in the safe
and must NEVER leave the workshop premises

ƒ Lost workshop cards must IMMEDIATELY be reported to VOSA. Initially


report loss to police to get crime incident number which can be quoted
to VOSA when getting a replacement card
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 69

The Company Card

ƒ Yellow in colour

ƒ Valid for 5 Years

ƒ Company may hold up to 2232 cards

ƒ Allows for locking of company data

ƒ Allows for the downloading of


company locked data

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 70
Company Responsibilities

ƒ Ensure all vehicles are used to within current EU drivers’ hours laws i.e.
561/2006 compliance

ƒ All drivers and support staff must be properly trained on VU usage and
interaction

ƒ Obtain company cards to enable ‘company locking’ of VU stored data

ƒ Ensure all drivers of their vehicles obtain driver cards

ƒ Download Data, or arrange externally, from all driver cards and VUs.
Recommend download times are 21 days for driver card and 56 days for VU

ƒ Data must be made available to authorities on request

ƒ Arrange workshop inspections of VUs, 2 yearly maximum

ƒ Recommended they carry-out ‘company’ VU inspections

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 71

The Control Card

ƒ Blue in Colour

ƒ Valid for 2 years

ƒ Issued to enforcement officer or


enforcement authority

ƒ Allows read only access to driver and


recording equipment data

ƒ Tied to the officer and the authority

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 72
Control Responsibilities

ƒ Control authorities must obtain control cards for each of their


enforcement officers

ƒ Ensure card is only used by named officer and authority – card is not
transferable

ƒ Download and check VU and driver or workshop smartcard stored data

ƒ Carryout enforcement VU inspections

ƒ A Control card only allows the authority to download data from the VU.
The Control card carries no legal authority

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 73

Digital Tachograph Modes of Operation

ƒ Operational Mode - Driver Card Inserted ()

ƒ Calibration Mode - Workshop Card Inserted ()

ƒ Control Mode - Control Card Inserted ()

ƒ Company Mode - Company Card Inserted ()

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 74
Section 1.7

Calibration Methods &


Understanding W, K & L Factors

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 75

W, K & L-Factor Definition

ƒ When fitting a Tachograph into a vehicle there are 3 calibration


parameters that must be taken into account

ƒ The W-factor – this is the characteristic coefficient of the vehicle

ƒ The K-factor – this is the characteristic coefficient of the Tachograph also


known as the Tachograph constant or the Tachograph control value

ƒ The L-factor – this is the effective circumference of the vehicle drive wheel
tyres

ƒ THE OBJECTIVE IN CALIBRATING THE TACHOGRAPH SYSTEM IS TO


DETERMINE THE W-FACTOR OF THE VEHICLE AND TO MATCH THE K-
FACTOR OF THE TACHOGRAPH WITH THE DETERMINED W-FACTOR
VALUE

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 76
W-Factor

ƒ The W-factor is defined as the number of turns or revolutions from the


vehicle gearbox at the speedometer take-off per kilometre travelled

ƒ For Mechanical Tachographs, which are cable driven, the W-factor is


expressed in revolutions/km, rev/km

ƒ For Electronic Tachographs, which use electronic gearbox senders, the W-


factor is most commonly now expressed in impulses/km, imp/km

ƒ The impulses/km value can be calculated by multiplying the revs/km value by


the sender’s pulses/rev value

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 77

K-Factor

ƒ The K-factor is expressed in revolutions/km or impulses/km depending on the


Tachograph type, mechanical or electronic

ƒ For most Mechanical Tachographs the K-factor is factory set and fixed at 1000
revs/km

ƒ In all cases of Mechanical Tachograph the fixed K-factor value is found on the
manufacturer's information label fitted inside the Tachograph

ƒ With a mechanical Tachograph, matching the vehicle W-factor to the fixed


Tachograph K-factor is achieved by placing a corrector gearbox in the
Tachograph drive line

ƒ The gearbox takes as its input, the revolutions/km of the vehicle and corrects
this to the required fixed revolutions/km for the Tachograph

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 78
K-Factor (continued)

ƒ Electronic Tachographs can have their set K-factor modified to suit installation
into different vehicles

ƒ Round electronic Tachographs mostly have a set of calibration switches which


are used to adjust the set Tachograph K-factor constant value

ƒ The radio sized electronic Tachograph K-factor value is programmed using a


Tachograph programming device, such as the MKII programmer

ƒ For electronic Tachographs, with the exception of Digital tachographs, the


manufacturer's information label fitted on or inside the Tachograph has a
space for recording the K-factor value set during the calibration process

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 79

L-Factor

ƒ The L-factor is the rolling circumference of the drive wheel tyres at the
time of calibration and is always expressed in millimetres

ƒ The size of the drive wheel tyres has a direct bearing on the number of
turns from the vehicle gearbox and hence the calibration of the
Tachograph system

ƒ The tyres cannot be sealed, therefore recording the measured L-factor at


the time of calibration is a necessity

ƒ Recording the L-factor is done on a Tachograph record sheet and on the


sealed installation plaque which is attached to the Tachograph at the end
of a calibration procedure

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 80
Establishing the Vehicle W and L-Factor Calibration Parameters

ƒ The W and L-factors vary for different vehicle and tyre combinations

ƒ A calibration must be performed on all new Tachograph installations,


including new vehicles, to determine these factors

ƒ These parameters must be re-determined every 6 years for Analogue and


Mechanical Tachograph systems and every 2 years for Digital Tachograph
systems - this is known as re-calibration of the Tachograph system

ƒ For an analogue or mechanical system these parameters must also be


checked at intervals of every 2 years to ensure that the system remains
within allowed tolerance levels

ƒ There are other situations where a Tachograph system must be recalibrated,


such as whenever a seal is broken in the Tachograph drive system, but these
are more fully described in the section on Tachograph legislation

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 81

Establishing the Vehicle W and L-Factor Calibration Parameters

ƒ In the U.K. all Tachograph centres, other than remote centres, are required
by law to have an electronic test rig to obtain the W and L-factors

ƒ The electronic test rig takes the form of a Rolling Road combined with a
Tachograph Calibration system

ƒ There are several types of system available. The Stoneridge Rolling Road
and MKII programmer are shown below. This system calculates using a
measured distance roller

ƒ The Hartridge system, although having been designed in the 1970’s, is still
the most commonly used rolling-road system in UK Approved Tachograph
centres. This system calculates using a fixed measuring speed of exactly
50 km/h

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 82
Establishing the Vehicle W and L-Factor Calibration Parameters

ƒ Where an electronic Tachograph Calibration system is not fitted, e.g. in


Ireland or remote stations in the U.K., or where the Tachograph calibration
system has failed, the ‘physical method’ must be used instead to determine
the vehicle calibration parameters

ƒ The physical method for determining W-factor consists of measuring, over a


calibrated fixed distance, usually 20 metres, either the number of gear-box
turns for a mechanical output system or the number of gearbox sender pulses
for an electronic output system

ƒ The measured W-factor value can be easily multiplied by a factor of 50, for a
20m track, to provide the required “per kilometre” value

ƒ The L-factor can be determined by marking the ground and measuring the
distance travelled for a revolution of the drive wheel. It is customary to
measure the distance travelled by five rotations of the driven wheel

ƒ In the case of a failed calibration system, permission must be obtained


from VOSA before using the physical method
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 83

Establishing the Vehicle W and L-Factor Calibration Parameters


– Stoneridge Rolling road

Distance Roller
Infra-red Transducer
Bogie Rollers
Console with MKII Programmer

Vehicle Support Roller

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 84
Rolling Road Calibration Method

ƒ A Rolling-Road is designed to carry out a dynamic measurement of the W and


L-Factors, without driving the vehicle on the road. The equipment comprises
of the "rolling road" itself i.e. various rollers and associated parts which are
mounted in the workshop floor, and a control console as shown above

ƒ The rolling road is robustly constructed and consists of rollers mounted on


frames that will support an axle weight of up to 15 tonnes. There is a 1000
pulses/rev shaft encoder that is connected to a ‘distance’ roller that accurately
determines the distance "travelled". This roller must be cleaned regularly to
maintain accurate measurement. There is also a set of bogie rollers which
are used to support the vehicle wheels

ƒ To count tyre revolutions, an infra-red reflective transducer is mounted on the


frame. It is important that the transducer is kept free of dirt etc. to ensure
the beam is strong enough to be reflected by a reflection patch placed on the
tyre wall. The other part of the equipment is the instrument console which
utilises a MKII Programmer to determine the vehicle calibration
parameters
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 85

Rolling Road Calibration Method – Pre-test Vehicle Checks

ƒ The vehicle must be unladen at the time of calibration and in the case of
tractor units, the trailer must be disconnected

ƒ With regard to the tyres the following should be noted,


• Tyre size

• The tyre pressure - check against the manufacturers recommended


rating and adjust if necessary

• The condition and wear of the tyres - do not test the vehicle if tyres
are illegal or potentially dangerous

• Check for stones in the tread, to avoid the hazard of flying stones
during the test

• If the tyres are wet, prior to driving the vehicle onto the rollers,
dry the tread on the drive wheel tyres
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 86
Rolling Road Calibration Method – Procedure

ƒ The procedure described below is for a Hartridge rolling road system using a
mechanical gearbox output drive. For other rolling roads the procedure will
be similar although the rolling road manufacturer’s literature should be
consulted for exact details of any differences

ƒ For vehicles which use an electronic gearbox sender a Stoneridge MKII


programmer can be used when determining W-factor. However L-factor can
still be determined using the method described below

ƒ The full procedure is as follows,


• Apply the brakes to the rollers. Drive the vehicle onto the rollers and
release the roller brakes

• Ensure that the relevant drive wheel is between 15 and 50 mm from the
photoelectric cell on the frame. For safety purposes it is advisable that
the front wheels have chocks applied in case the vehicle
inadvertently moves off the rollers
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 87

Rolling Road Calibration Method – Procedure

• Attach a reflective patch to the tyre wall and set the lamp beam
• Connect the mechanical pickup transmitter to the Tachograph drive
output on the vehicle gearbox
• Engage the odometer roller onto the tyre
• Set the tyre factor counter to the figure given in the console table for
the relevant tyre size
• Position the console so that it is visible from the cab and take the hand
set into the cab
• Run the vehicle in suitable gear so that a steady 50km/h speed is
maintained and is shown on console
• Select ‘W-factor’ on the handset and press the start button. The
number of turns from the vehicle gearbox will appear on the display
and will cease counting when 1km is reached. The final number shown
is the vehicle W-factor expressed in revs/km

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 88
Rolling Road Calibration Method – Procedure

• Change the handset switch to 'L' and press the start button. With the
vehicle running at a steady speed of 50km/h, the circumference
measurement will start counting on the display and will stop when the
measurement is complete. The final number shown is the vehicle L-
factor expressed in millimetres

• With the vehicle drive wheels stopped, apply the roller brakes,
disconnect the test equipment from the vehicle and drive the vehicle off
the rollers

• The rolling road must NOT be left with the brake applied as this could
cause binding rollers which leads to erroneous readings. Also do NOT
prolong the test as overheating of the tyres will cause inaccurate results

• When determining the W and L-Factor, the results should be verified by


pressing the reset button and repeating the test until CONSECUTIVE
SIMILAR RESULTS ARE ACHIEVED

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 89

Rolling Road Calibration Method – Dual Axle Vehicles

ƒ For vehicles with twin axles a rolling-road fitted with Bogie rollers must be
used. These are idler rollers fitted at the rear of the calibration rollers

ƒ When calibrating a twin axle vehicle it is important to ensure that all axles are
running freely. Should a binding axle occur it is possible that random
readings may result. This is caused through the other wheels "flying". To
overcome this difficulty, it may be necessary to engage the inter axle diff lock
to stabilise the readings. Once the vehicle is calibrated DO NOT FORGET to
disengage the diff lock

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 90
W-Factor Determination - The Physical Method

ƒ This method of determining the W-Factor is carried out by rolling the vehicle
over a measured distance and either,
• measuring the number of turns from the gearbox mechanical drive
using a turns counter
• or for an electronic gearbox sender, counting the number of pulses
output from the sender with a pulse counter such as the Stoneridge
MKII programmer

ƒ Both methods, are very accurate with the turns counter accurate to 0.01 of a
revolution and the programmer accurate to the nearest pulse

ƒ The rolling distance is usually a fixed 20 metres and therefore, the turns or
pulses figure determined must be multiplied by 50 to achieve a ‘per km’ value

ƒ When using a MKII programmer this is done automatically and only the final
pulses/km value is shown

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 91

W-Factor Determination - The Physical Method –


Turns Counter Procedure

ƒ The procedure for measuring W-Factor using the physical method with a
turns counter is as follows,

• Select a straight, flat distance and mark off 20 metres or use the
marked fixed track if it exits

• Check the vehicle tyre pressures and the condition of the tyres

• Mount a pointer on to the driver's side of the vehicle, ensuring that the
pointer is suitably positioned

• Attach a turns counter to the gearbox drive with a suitable length of


flex drive. Ensure a good cable run. Mount the counter in a
convenient position for viewing throughout the test

• Position the vehicle with pointer 'P' approximately 3 metres from mark
'A', i.e. the start of the 20m track

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 92
W-Factor Determination - The Physical Method –
Turns Counter Procedure

• Drive the vehicle slowly forward until pointer ‘P’ is aligned with point
‘A’. This initial movement will eliminate any backlash in the
transmission. Take the reading on the counter and note. Do not take
the vehicle out of gear

• Drive the vehicle forward slowly until the pointer aligns with mark 'B'.
Again note the reading on the counter

• Drive the vehicle forward past mark 'B' by about 3 metres and then
reverse slowly back to mark 'B'. Again note reading on the counter.
Do not take the vehicle out of gear

• Reverse slowly back to mark 'A' and note the reading on the counter

• Repeat the above procedure starting with the vehicle 3 metres from
point ‘A’ and this will give 4 readings at marks 'A' and 'B‘

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 93

W-Factor Determination - The Physical Method –


Turns Counter Procedure

• Subtract the readings at mark ‘A’ from the readings at mark ‘B’. This
will give the number of turns over the fixed 20 metre track distance
• The tolerance of the 20m track is ±10mm
• Take the average of the 4 readings
• Multiply this average reading by the figure required to make the
measured distance, i.e. 20 metres x 50 = 1000 metres = 1km.
Therefore the average turns will require to be multiplied by 50. This
will give the W-Factor, or number of turns per kilometre

Turns
Counter
Pointer

3m 20 m

Gear
Box A B
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 94
W-Factor Determination - The Physical Method –
Turns Counter Example

ƒ Measured distance = 20 metres

ƒ Turns Counter Readings


READING AT MARK A READING AT MARK B DIFFERENCE (B – A)
10.12 20.24 10.12
10.20 20.36 10.16
10.24 20.38 10.14
10.21 20.35 10.14

TOTAL 40.56
AVERAGE 10.14

ƒ Average is 10.14 revolutions over 20 metres, 10.14*50 = 507 revs over 1000
metres

ƒ Therefore W-Factor = 507 revs/km

ƒ If an 8-pulse/rev sender is connected to the gearbox,


W-factor = 8*507 = 4056 imp/km
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 95

W-Factor Determination - The Physical Method –


MKII Fixed Distance Method 2

ƒ This method also uses a 20m measured distance and is the best physical
method that can be used for vehicles that have a proximity sender where
turns cannot be measured

ƒ Care must be taken to ensure that the Fixed Distance Length set via the MKII
Diagnostics menu and the actual track length are the same, otherwise the W-
Factor determined will be incorrect

ƒ The vehicle is driven along the measured track but all measurements are
automatically carried out by the MKII, which then automatically determines
the W-Factor

ƒ To simplify the measurements made, a flexi-switch is used and makes contact


with a marker at each end of the track. There is then no requirement for any
operator intervention. The only requirement is to drive the vehicle the length
of the track at a reasonably constant speed, a few km/h, such that the flexi-
switch hits the markers at either end of the track

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 96
W-Factor Determination - The Physical Method –
MKII Fixed Distance Method 2

ƒ The benefits of this method are many -

• Easy to use

• No manual intervention required

• Works with all types of pulser including those which stop generating
pulses at low speeds

• Cheap to use. Avoids the need to invest in a rolling road

• Very accurate. The measurement accuracy is greater than that of


an older Hartridge style rolling road

• This method can thus be used to check the accuracy of older style
rolling roads

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 97

W-Factor Determination - The Physical Method –


MKII Fixed Distance Method 2 Procedure

ƒ Fixed Distance Method No. 2 requires the vehicle to be driven such that a
flexi-switch attached to the vehicle strikes a marker consistently at either end
of the fixed track. To maintain the measurement accuracy the flexi switch
should be attached to a part of the vehicle rigidly attached to the chassis
such as the front bumper

ƒ Ideally the flexi-switch should be mounted with its operating lever pointing
vertically downwards and the markers should be placed on the ground.
Alternatively, the flexi-switch may be mounted with its operating level
pointing horizontally to strike against vertical posts

ƒ The markers at either end of the track are best implemented using wooden or
concrete blocks, ideally about 1m long with sides 100 to 150mm. Steel joist
material is particularly suitable. The requirement is to have a marker which
will have a well defined point of contact with the flexi-switch and which will
not move during the test

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 98
W-Factor Determination - The Physical Method –
MKII Fixed Distance Method 2 - Procedure

ƒ Although it is perfectly acceptable to mount the flexi-switch on the side


of the vehicle with the markers to the side of the vehicle, some difficulty
may be experienced in ensuring that the switch hits the markers
consistently. A better arrangement is to mount the switch centrally on
the front of the vehicle and arrange the markers such that the vehicle
passes directly over them

ƒ Select FIXED DISTANCE #2 from the MKII Main Menu, and follow the
instructions displayed in the step-by-step screens that follow

MKII Programmer
Marker
Flexi-switch Posts

3m 20 m

Gearbox
Sender A B
Output
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 99

W-Factor Determination - The Physical Method –


MKII Fixed Distance Method 2

ƒ For best accuracy two runs should be carried out in each direction rather
than four in one direction since this will take account of any slight
gradient of the track

ƒ The repeatability of the Fixed Distance Calibration No 2 method is such


that the effect of a slight gradient of the fixed track is easily measurable

ƒ By taking the average of runs in opposite directions the effect of the


gradient is removed

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 100
L-Factor Determination – Physical Method

ƒ This can be done on a flat surface, using a measuring tape and chalk, and
using the following method,
• Mark the drive wheel tyre with chalk and make a corresponding chalk
mark on the ground
• Drive the vehicle in a straight line so that the drive wheel turns through
5 revolutions and then chalk a mark on the ground a second time
• Measure the distance between the two chalk marks on the ground and
divide by 5
• This will give the effective circumference of 1 turn of the drive wheel
tyre, which is the L-factor

ƒ Distance measured for 5 revolutions of tyre = 16.14metres

ƒ Therefore L-factor = 16140/5 = 3228mm

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 101

Implementing the Determined W and L-Factor Values

ƒ Once the W-Factor of the vehicle is determined, the K-Factor of the


Tachograph must be matched with the determined W-Factor value as was
explained previously

ƒ The L-factor value determined must be programmed into the Tachograph if


the Tachograph is of a type that allows this, e.g. radio sized Analogue
Tachograph or Digital Tachograph. In all cases the L-Factor value determined
must be recorded on the Tachograph Installation plaque and also on the
Tachograph calibration record sheet

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 102
Section 1.8

Senders & Cables

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 103

Senders & Cables - Introduction

ƒ Mechanical Tachographs use a mechanical flexible rotating shaft drive, which


is connected to the vehicle gearbox, to drive the speed and distance
measuring systems that are housed within the instrument

ƒ An electronic Tachograph eliminates the need for a mechanical rotating shaft


drive by using an electronic speed sensor, or sender as it has become
traditionally known for Analogue Tachographs, that is coupled directly to the
gearbox

ƒ An electrical cable connects the output speed signals from the sender directly
to the Tachograph rear connectors

ƒ Electronic Tachographs contain circuitry that measure the frequency of pulses


received from the sender to calculate the vehicle speed and distance travelled

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 104
Senders & Cables - Introduction

ƒ There are a number of different sender types that have been made available
over the years for different analogue Tachograph types, namely the 2-pulse
sender, the 8-pulse sender, the non-encrypted proximity sender and the
KITAS1 encrypted proximity sender

ƒ Digital Tachographs may only be connected to a KITAS2 type encrypted


sender. It should also be noted that a Digital Tachograph sender is referred
to in the Digital Tachograph legislation as a Motion Sensor

ƒ Unlike a mechanical drive cable installation, the installation of an electronic


gearbox sender and cable is not critical in terms of bend radius or length.
Because of this it is feasible to provide a range of ready made sender and
cable assemblies. Stoneridge provide encrypted, standard 4-wire and
armoured 4-wire sender cable assemblies in lengths of 4, 6, 10 and 14 metres

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 105

Senders & Cables - Introduction

ƒ Any length of electric cable may be used between the sender and the
Tachograph head. Any cable unused after fitting one of the standard
length sender cables can be left at the gearbox end as long as it is safely
secured, coiled and clipped to the chassis rail

ƒ Having extra sender cable available at the gearbox end allows the gearbox
to be dropped to replace a clutch, for example, without the need to break
any seals in the Tachograph system which would result in the need for the
vehicle to be sent to an Approved Tachograph Centre for re-sealing

ƒ This will result in reduced vehicle downtime and hence savings for the
vehicle operator. If the gearbox is to be dropped without disconnecting
the sender cable, extra care must be taken to ensure no damage is done
to the sender or sender cable when lowering

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 106
Senders & Cables – 4-Wire Non-armoured Cables

ƒ An example 4-Wire non-armoured sender cable is


shown. It consists of 4-wire electric cable that has
one end fitted with a yellow ‘B’ socket Amp
minitimer connector that fits into the rear of a
Tachograph. The other end is fitted with a round
4-pin spade terminal connector that mates with
non-encrypted senders

ƒ This type of cable must only be used in vehicles


registered before 1st January 1996. Vehicles
registered on or after this date, and which are not
fitted with an encrypted sender, must by law be
fitted with armoured versions of the cables to
minimise tampering risk

ƒ 4-Wire cable assemblies are available in standard


lengths of 4, 6, 10 and 14 metres

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 107

Senders & Cables – 4-Wire Armoured Cables

ƒ An example 4-Wire armoured sender cable is shown. The cable and cable
connections are identical to that for the non-armoured version described
above except that the cable must be protected by steel sheath to minimise
the tampering risk

ƒ This type of cable must, by law, be used in any vehicle, not fitted with an
encrypted sender, registered on or after 1st January 1996. 4-Wire armoured
cable assemblies are available in standard lengths of 6, 10 and 14 metres

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 108
Senders & Cables – Encrypted Sender Cables

ƒ An encrypted sender cable is shown. This, like the non-encrypted cables, also
has one end fitted with a yellow ‘B’ socket Amp minitimer connector to fit into
the rear of a Tachograph. However, the other end of the cable is fitted with
a 4-pin round terminal connector that mates with an encrypted sender

ƒ This type of cable must only be used in vehicles that are fitted with a gearbox
encrypted sender. Due to the unique encryption signal code that is generated
by pairing a sender with a Tachograph there is no requirement for the cable
to be armoured, regardless of the vehicle date of first registration

ƒ Encrypted sender cables are available in standard lengths of 6, 10 and 14m

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 109

Senders & Cables – 2-Pulse Gearbox Sender

ƒ The first Veeder-Root sender device comprised a one-pole permanent magnet


mounted on a slotted shaft running on a bearing pressed into a steel housing.
The speed signal is generated by two Hall-effect magnetic switches that are
mounted diametrically opposite, adjacent to the rotating magnet assembly.
As the magnet passes by, each Hall-effect switch turns on and then off again
one after the other to produce one pulse each for each revolution of the
gearbox drive shaft

ƒ A separate wire is used to connect each Hall-effect switch to the Tachograph


but the Tachograph combines the signals from each of the two sender
channels and thus two pulses are received for each revolution of the gearbox
shaft. Consequently this sender device became known as the 2-Pulse Sender

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 110
Senders & Cables – 2-Pulse Gearbox Sender

1 Revolution of
Sender Input Shaft

Pulse from Pulse from Pulse from


Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 1

180° 180°

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 111

Senders & Cables – 8-Pulse Gearbox Sender

ƒ The initial 8-Pulse sender devices (2155 and 2157) were developed by
Kienzle. These devices use a Hall-effect IC generator and utilise an 8-pole
magnet to produce a sender output speed signal that gives 8 output pulses
for each revolution of the gearbox shaft. The resolution of the 8-pulse
sender is 4 times better than a 2-Pulse sender

ƒ Stoneridge have also developed a range of 8-pulse senders

ƒ The initial 8-pulse sender devices had only one speed signal channel and
thus these early devices were known as 3-wire 8-Pulse Senders. Because
the devices only had one speed signal channel, it was easy to tamper with
the speed signal without detection. Subsequently it became necessary to
develop an 8-Pulse sender that had a second complimentary speed signal
channel that made tampering with the speed signal more detectable

ƒ These devices with two speed pulse channels are known as 4-Wire 8-Pulse
senders

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 112
Senders & Cables – 8-Pulse Gearbox Sender

ƒ Stoneridge 8-pulse senders also utilise a Hall-effect IC that produces 8


impulses for each revolution of the gearbox shaft. Stoneridge only
produce 4-Wire senders

ƒ Stoneridge Tachographs such as the 8400 and 2400 will enter error modes
if the input signals from the two speed signal channels do not match. The
Kienzle 2159 sender is also an equivalent 4-Wire 8-pulse sender

ƒ An 8400 Tachograph will not work with a 3-wire sender although an


electronic 3-wire to 4-wire converter can be used if a vehicle is fitted with
an old style 3-wire 8-pulse sender

ƒ The 8-Pulses per rev signal and complimentary signal are shown below.
Examples of 3-Wire and 4-Wire 8-pulse senders and some example
Stoneridge 8-Pulse senders are also shown below

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 113

Senders & Cables – 8-Pulse Gearbox Sender

1 Revolution of
Sender Input Shaft

Pulses from Channel 1

Pulses from Channel 2

4-Wire 3-Wire

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 114
Senders & Cables – Proximity Gearbox Sender Devices

ƒ Proximity senders also utilise a Hall-effect IC to generate a speed pulse train


that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle to output to the Tachograph.
However unlike 8-pulse senders where the sender fits directly onto the
gearbox drive shaft to count gearbox revolutions, the proximity devices
generate a speed pulse for every tooth on the gearbox tone-wheel that
passes the sender as shown below,
Gearbox Tone-Wheel

Proximity Sender

Hall-Effect IC

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 115

Senders & Cables – Proximity Gearbox Sender Devices

ƒ Stoneridge proximity senders are all 4-Wire devices, i.e. they have a second
speed pulse channel that is used for tamper detection purposes, and come in
a range of different lengths to suit various different gearbox types as shown
below. The senders have an M18x1.5 thread for screwing securely into the
gearbox and have a 4-pin bayonet connector for attaching to the sender cable
ƒ Note: The sender cable must be of an armoured type for all vehicles
registered on or after 01/01/1996

DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER


Proximity Sender 19.8mm 9954-004
Proximity Sender 25.0mm 9954-005
Proximity Sender 35.0mm 9954-006
Proximity Sender 63.2mm 9954-007
Proximity Sender 90.0mm 9954-008
Proximity Sender 115.0mm 9954-009

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 116
Senders & Cables – KITAS1 Gearbox Encrypted Senders

ƒ Stoneridge KITAS1 Encrypted senders are also proximity devices and their
construction is very similar to standard 4-wire proximity sender devices.
KITAS1 Encrypted devices must only be used with Analogue Tachographs
that are compatible with them e.g. 2400 series Tachograph

ƒ The main difference between an encrypted sender and a 4-wire proximity


device is that the encrypted device has an encryption communication
channel instead of the standard ‘complimentary’ channel that the 4-wire
devices have. The encryption channel has encryption data embedded into
the complimentary signal as shown below,
Pulses from Channel 1

Pulses from Channel 2

Encryption Signal
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 117

Senders & Cables – KITAS1 Gearbox Encrypted Senders

ƒ At installation the encrypted sender must be ‘paired’, i.e. matched, with


the Tachograph. After pairing, during normal operation, as well as the
speed signal the sender also sends an encrypted signal to the Tachograph
and any tampering will thus be detected and recorded

ƒ Stoneridge KITAS1 proximity encrypted senders also come in a range of


different lengths to suit various different gearbox types as shown below.
Like standard proximity senders, encrypted devices have an M18 x 1.5
thread for screwing securely into the gearbox and have a 4-pin bayonet
connector for attaching to the sender cable

ƒ Note: due to the encryption signal provided by an encrypted sender there


is no requirement to use armoured cable for the sender cable to the
Tachograph

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 118
Senders & Cables – KITAS1 Gearbox Encrypted Senders

DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER


KITAS1 Encrypted Proximity Sender 19.8mm 9954-112
(1.2mm Washer)
KITAS1 Encrypted Proximity Sender 25.0mm 9954-113
(1.2mm Washer)
KITAS1 Encrypted Proximity Sender 35.0mm 9954-114
(1.2mm Washer)
KITAS1 Encrypted Proximity Sender 63.2mm 9954-115
(1.2mm Washer)
KITAS1 Encrypted Proximity Sender 80.0mm 9954-116
(1.2mm Washer)
KITAS1 Encrypted Proximity Sender 90.0mm 9954-117
(1.2mm Washer)
KITAS1 Encrypted Proximity Sender 115.0mm 9954-118
(1.2mm Washer)
KITAS1 Encrypted Proximity Sender 136.8mm 9954-119
(1.2mm Washer)
KITAS1 Encrypted Proximity Sender 19.8mm 9954-122
(1.8mm Washer)
KITAS1 Encrypted Proximity Sender 19.8mm 9954-132
(No Washer)
KITAS1 Encrypted Proximity Sender 63.2mm 9954-142
(Ford Transit 6-speed Gearbox)

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 119

Senders & Cables – KITAS2 Gearbox Encrypted Senders

ƒ KITAS2 Encrypted senders are very similar in construction to KITAS1 devices,


but can only be used with Digital Tachographs. KITAS1 and KITAS2 are not
interchangeable as KITAS2 uses a more advanced encryption method

ƒ A KITAS2 encrypted sender must be ‘paired’, i.e. matched, with the Digital
Tachograph. After pairing, during normal operation, as well as the speed
signal the sender also sends an encryption signal to the Tachograph and thus
any tampering will be detected and recorded

ƒ Stoneridge KITAS2 proximity encrypted senders come in a range of lengths to


suit different gearboxes as shown in the table below. KITAS2 senders also
have an M18 x 1.5 thread for screwing securely into the gearbox and have a
4-pin bayonet connector for attaching to the sender cable

ƒ Note: due to the encryption signal provided by an encrypted sender there is


no requirement to use armoured cable for the sender cable to the
Tachograph
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 120
Senders & Cables – KITAS2 Gearbox Encrypted Senders

ƒ There is also a KITAS2 8-pulse sender with a M22 x 1.5 thread that can be
connected to a standard gearbox 3mm spade drive shaft. This device can
be used to fit a Digital Tachograph system into a vehicle that cannot be
fitted with a KITAS2 proximity device
DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER
KITAS2 Encrypted Proximity Sender 9954-200
19.8mm (1.2mm Washer)
KITAS2 Encrypted Proximity Sender 9954-201
90.0mm (1.2mm Washer)
KITAS2 Encrypted Proximity Sender 9954-202
25.0mm (1.2mm Washer)
KITAS2 Encrypted Proximity Sender 9954-203
35.0mm (1.2mm Washer)
KITAS2 Encrypted Proximity Sender 9954-204
136.8mm (1.2mm Washer)
KITAS2 Encrypted 8-Pulse Sender 9954-205
KITAS2 Encrypted Proximity Sender 9954-206
63.2mm (1.2mm Washer)

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 121

Senders & Cables – M1N1 Adaptor

ƒ For M1 and N1 vehicles requiring a Digital Tachograph that cannot be fitted


with a Kitas2 sensor directly or via a Mechanical adaptor, the solution for
these vehicles comes in the form of an M1N1 Adaptor

ƒ The M1N1 Adaptor legislation, Commission Regulation (EC) No 68/2009,


came into force on 24th July 2009

ƒ A Type Approved Adaptor can only be installed in M1 or N1 class vehicles


registered from 1st May 2006 to 31st December 2013 inclusive, where it is
not mechanically possible to install any other type of existing approved
motion sensor

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 122
Senders and Cables – Mechanical Adaptors

ƒ The Solutions for some vehicles were found and approved in the form of
Mechanical adaptors, either an intermediate device fitted between a
standard Kitsas2 sensor and the gearbox or a mechanical adaptor that
allows the sensor to be located in the differential housing

ƒ Example Stoneridge mechanical solutions are shown below, i.e. Hummer


H2 and Ford Ranger / Mazda BT-50, 2007+

KITAS2 Sensor Stoneridge Adaptor Complete Unit


– Hummer H2 – Hummer H2 – Ford/Mazda

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 123

Senders & Cables – Gearbox Sender Installation

ƒ A variety of senders can be connected to a gearbox in order to obtain the


speed pulses required for Tachograph operation. The most common
sender types available are 8-pulses per rev, both 3-wire and 4-wire, non-
encrypted proximity and encrypted proximity. Both proximity types are
available in a variety of lengths for fitting to different gearbox types

ƒ The 8-pulse sender units are made to a DIN standard and have a 3mm
slot coupling and female M22 x 1.5 thread. The 8-pulse sender can be
fitted directly to a vehicle gearbox that has a drive arrangement that also
complies with the DIN standard, i.e. a 3mm tongue and male M22 x 1.5
thread. The 8-pulse sender has a 4-pin spade terminal and bayonet-type
connector for attaching the sender cable

ƒ Stoneridge proximity senders, encrypted and non-encrypted, come in a


range of lengths and have an M18 x 1.5 thread. A sender of the correct
length should be screwed into the gearbox with a maximum torque of
50Nm. The sender has a four round-pin, bayonet-type connector for
attaching the sender cable
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 124
Senders & Cables – Gearbox Sender Installation

ƒ Should the gearbox not be compatible with any of the standard senders
available, a range of adaptors are available to allow one of the sender types to
be fitted

ƒ Two fibre washers are supplied with the sender to make a seal between the
gearbox and the sender unit to prevent water ingress and oil leakage. It also
ensures adequate axial clearance between the tip of the 3mm tongue and the
bottom of the slot

ƒ Also ensure that the connecting nut is secured. Loose nuts will cause wear
and tear in the shaft and erroneous pulsing

ƒ Note: It is essential that the 3mm tongue is properly engaged in the


sender slot before tightening the nut. Failure to do this may result in
damage to the sender unit by forcing the slotted drive shaft into the
body of the sender

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 125

Senders & Cables – Sender Cable Installation

ƒ Most Stoneridge sender cables are available in standard lengths of 6, 10


and 14 metres. The cable assembly should be laid in the vehicle to
ensure that the length is adequate bearing in mind the criteria that follows
below. As was explained previously, the excess length of the cable should
be coiled and clipped to the chassis rail

ƒ Wherever possible the cable should be protected from possible damage by


routing alongside other cables

ƒ Loose connections should be avoided as they may catch or drag

ƒ The cable must not be clipped or tied to any moving parts

ƒ Ensure that the Tachograph may be removed from the vehicle panel with
all its cables still plugged in

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 126
Senders & Cables – Sender Cable Installation

ƒ Do not pull the cable tight at either end - cable bend radius should be at
least 15 cm for an armoured cable and 2 cm for a non-armoured cable

ƒ With tilt cabs, care should be taken that the cable cannot be nipped, cut or
stretched when the cab is tilted

ƒ The cable should be routed well away from sources of intense heat such as
an exhaust manifold or a turbocharger

ƒ Sufficient cable should be left at the gearbox end so that the gearbox can
be removed without breaking seals

ƒ Having satisfied the above conditions, the cable assembly should be


secured at least every 45cm using cable ties

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 127

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 128
Section 1.9

Sealing & Plaques

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 129

Sealing – General Description

ƒ For Tachograph installations on vehicles within the scope of EU legislation,


it is necessary to seal all specified parts of the system against unauthorised
interference

ƒ To comply with the law, a Tachograph system must be sealed at all times

ƒ Provision must be made for vehicles to be driven to a VOSA approved


Tachograph centre for re-calibration where maintenance work, e.g.
gearbox repair, has involved the breaking of a Tachograph system seal

ƒ The approved Tachograph centre is allowed to insist that an appointment


for the sealing and calibration work is made in advance

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 130
Sealing – General Description

ƒ If a vehicle, which requires a sealed Tachograph system, comes in to an


approved Tachograph centre with any Tachograph system seals not
intact, then a full calibration and re-seal of the system MUST be carried
out

ƒ Should a vehicle come for a Tachograph repair with all seals intact, the
repair work may be carried out on the system under the MINOR WORK
PROCEDURE depending on the nature of the work

ƒ In the case of a minor work procedure, re-sealing can be carried out


without recalibration. The minor work procedure is explained in greater
detail later on in the section

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 131

Sealing Parts - Lead & Red Seals

ƒ A lead seal is compressed around a loop of sealing wire using a pair of


sealing pliers 7955-008. These pliers should be equipped with anvils
supplied by Stoneridge and marked with the appropriate manufacturer
symbol and a valid VOSA Approved Tachograph centre number, e.g.
GBL 300. Lead seals are used to seal the sender, and parts of the
sender cabling system

ƒ Red plastic seals must be embossed with the relevant station number.
This is done using sealing pliers 7955-255 equipped with anvils
supplied by Stoneridge and marked with a valid VOSA Approved
Tachograph centre number, e.g. GBL 300. Red seals are used to seal
various areas of the Tachograph system

ƒ The Tachograph seals required vary depending on the exact


Tachograph model but include a calibration switch cover, a
programming socket cover, rear connector seals, jack plug seals and
round plastic seals. The exact requirements for each Tachograph are
described in the sub-sections on each Tachograph that follow
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 132
Sealing - Drive Line Seals

ƒ A seal is made on every junction in the drive line by


compressing a lead seal around a join in a loop of sealing wire.
The wire and lead seal are positioned in the area to be sealed
so that the wire cannot be removed or parted without breaking
the lead seal

ƒ To assure the security of this type of seal, the sealing wire


should always be pulled taut before sealing. The lead seal
should always be positioned in such a way that it keeps the
sealed wire taut

ƒ The wire used is stainless steel sealing wire part number


6955-448 and the lead seals are part number 4058-001

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 133

Plaques

ƒ The remainder of the Tachograph system seals are labels, examples of which
are described below. In most cases a clear overlay is used to avoid any
corruption of what is written on the label

ƒ For the Digital Tachograph the VOSA approved Stoneridge installation/


calibration plaque is a metallised plaque that is of a type that cannot be
removed without damaging it and hence no overlay is required

ƒ Vehicle calibration details are recorded on or in the Tachograph using a


calibration label and overlay with the combined part no. 7955-111. This
method of recording vehicle calibration details is VOSA approved for use on
both analogue and mechanical Tachographs

ƒ In early 2006 VOSA approval was gained for using the metallised Digital
installation/calibration plaque with analogue and mechanical Tachographs

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 134
Plaques – Different Types

ƒ Installation/Calibration Label with


Coverlay, 7955-111
• Vehicle calibration details are
recorded using a combined
calibration & overlay label.
Suitable for both mechanical &
analogue Tachographs

ƒ 2-Year Inspection Label, 6955-579


• Once the Tachograph system
passes all the 2-year tests, this
label should be fitted beside the
current Installation label.
Coverlay for the written version is
6955-562

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 135

Plaques – Different Types

ƒ Minor Work Label 6955-561


• To be used on a Tachograph system
that is repaired under the Minor Work
Procedure scheme. Coverlay for this
label is 6955-562

ƒ Previous Odometer Meter label 6955-557


• Used when the odometer is advanced
on a replacement Tachograph to match
the distance recorded on the old unit.
The distance at changeover should be
noted on this label and fitted into the
odometer housing

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 136
Plaques – Different Types

ƒ Calibration Label Metallised - Analogue and Digital


Approved
• This plaque it is of a type that cannot be
removed without damaging it
• Plaque must be fitted on or beside the VU
and must be visible at all times

ƒ Information on the plaque must include


• Name and address of approved technician
or workshop
• W, K and L factors
• Tyre size
• VIN
• Date of W & L factor determination

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 137

How and Where to Seal an Electronic Tachograph System

ƒ Sender at the Gearbox - To prevent unauthorised disconnection of the


gearbox sender, regardless of type, the retaining nut is cross-drilled so that it
may be wired and sealed to a suitable drilled bolt in the gearbox as below

ƒ Sealing the gearbox sender is mandatory for all Tachograph systems

ƒ For a non-encrypted system, the sender cable must also be sealed at both
ends

ƒ For vehicles registered on or after 01/01/1996, and fitted with a non-


encrypted system, the sender cable must be of an approved armoured type

ƒ For an encrypted system, only the gearbox sender seal is required and non-
armoured sender cable can be used for all encrypted systems

ƒ Should an adaptor be fitted, the sealing wire must also pass through a hole
cross drilled in that component

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 138
How and Where to Seal an Electronic Tachograph System

ƒ Sealing Sender at the Gearbox -

Wired Seal

Sensor Cable Gearbox

Sensor Connector
and Retaining Nut

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 139

Sealing - Breaks in the Sender Line

ƒ Any breaks in the sender line must also be sealed

ƒ It may be necessary from time to time to fit a Triplex Box in order to use 2
outputs from the gearbox. This could be due to automatic chassis
lubrication unit or a speed limiter sensor, etc. In this case, since this
accessory equipment is on the Tachograph drive line, it is necessary to seal
the triplex box

ƒ It is also possible to fit the transmitter on the output side of the lubricator
pump or air control unit in some cases and therefore the pump or air
control unit must also be sealed as part of the Tachograph drive line

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 140
Sealing - Other Senders and Stoneridge Tachographs

ƒ When a Stoneridge Tachograph is to be used in conjunction with an existing


8-pulse per revolution sender, then it may be necessary to convert the cable
connector for the Stoneridge Tachograph

ƒ In order to connect this type of sender to the Stoneridge Tachograph, it is


necessary to use a FLYING LEAD converter

ƒ One end of the flying lead is terminated with the appropriate Stoneridge
Tachograph plug, the other end of the flying lead is terminated with the
mate of the sender plug

ƒ When joined, the sender/flying lead connection must be sealed using a


sealing box, part number 6955-596. The sealing box itself should be sealed
using sealing wire and a lead seal

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 141

Sealing for the 1400 Series Tachograph – Rear Sockets

ƒ On the rear of a 1400 Tachograph there are up to 4 connecting sockets of


which 2 are in general use, power socket A and sender socket B

ƒ The third and fourth sockets are only used where one or more of the
accessory outputs are in use or the two-speed axle input is required. To
simplify the sealing of the rear of the 1400 Tachograph, a sealing plate has
been designed which covers all 4-plug locations, whether or not all 4 plugs
are fitted

ƒ The plate is held in place by a screw with a cross-drilled hole. Sealing wire is
passed through the hole in the cross-drilled screw and through the hole
drilled in the sealing plate. It is now impossible to remove the electrical plugs
without breaking the seal

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 142
Sealing for the 1400 Series Tachograph – Factory Seals

ƒ The inner rear cover on the 1400 Tachograph is a different style to that fitted
to the 1100 mechanical Tachograph, however, the method of sealing the
securing screws is the same
ƒ The sealing of the odometer housing is the same as for the 1100 mechanical
Tachograph
ƒ A 1400 Tachograph is calibrated by means of a set of 8 switches situated
inside the instrument at the top left hand side of the rear cover
ƒ The calibration switch aperture must be sealed to prevent tampering. This is
done by means of a cover that is placed over the calibration switches on
grooves in the plastic rear cover. Two types of cover were produced for this
task, a metal cover and a plastic cover
ƒ Both covers seat on grooves in the rear cover plate below the calibration
switches and completely cover the calibration switches aperture
ƒ Removal of the cover is prevented by a sealing label marked with the date,
the W-factor of the vehicle in which the Tachograph is fitted, and the number
of the Approved Tachograph Centre that carried out the work

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 143

Calibration Plaque Position – 1400 Tachograph

ƒ Having carried out the calibration procedure as defined previously, the


following information must be recorded on a calibration label –

• The name and address of the Approved Tachograph Centre that


carried out the calibration procedure

• The Vehicle W-factor in either revolutions per km (U/km) or impulses


per km (Imp/km) - score out the unit which does not apply

• The Vehicle L-factor, measured in mm

• The Date on which the calibration took place

• The Seal number of the Approved Tachograph Centre that carried out
the calibration

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 144
Calibration Plaque Position – 1400 Tachograph

ƒ The Stoneridge calibration label is designed to fit inside the Tachograph on


the inner rim of the rear case as shown,
Calibration Label
(with Plastic Overlay
applied on top of
label) fitted either on
rim or on inner panel
(as shown)

ƒ IMPORTANT - The calibration label should not be applied to the plastic rear
cover within the Tachograph as free rotation of the chart may be prevented if
the label or overlay is wrinkled or not properly fixed along the edges

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 145

Sealing for the 8300 and 8400 Series Tachographs - Rear


Sealing Shroud

ƒ Having made all the necessary connections at


the rear, the sealing shroud is fitted

ƒ For a standard cable the wires run out


through the slots in the shroud

ƒ For armoured cable the sender cable ferrule


should be clipped into the top of the sealing
shroud. The shroud is retained in position by
inserting a red seal, 6952-377, into the hole
in the shroud

ƒ The seal must be embossed with the


Tachograph Centre number prior to fitting as
shown

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 146
Sealing for the 8300 and 8400 Series Tachographs – Rear
Sealing Shroud Additional Requirement

ƒ If the Tachograph is fitted with armoured cable the following procedure


must be carried out as a VOSA requirement

ƒ Check the rear Sealing Shroud that is used to secure the power and signal
cable plugs at the rear of the Tachograph

ƒ If no sealing label has been previously fitted, or if the fitted seal is no


longer intact, conduct checks on the integrity of system and then seal, or
re-seal, as follows,

• Seal the rear shroud in the normal manner using the embossed red
seal as described and shown above

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 147

Sealing for the 8300 and 8400 Series Tachographs – Rear


Sealing Shroud Additional Requirement

• Take a K-factor label, 6953-266, and cross through the “Imp/km”


marking and enter the Tachograph Centre Seal Number in similar
style to that shown in Appendix N of VOSA Approved Tachograph
Centre Manual

• Affix the white K-factor label vertically so that it is affixed to both


the side of the rear sealing shroud and the casing of the
Tachograph. Ensure that label is ‘tucked’ over the lip to ensure a
good seal

• Complete the sealing process by covering the white K-factor label


with the normal blue edged plastic adhesive overlay, 6953-267

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 148
Sealing for the 8300 and 8400 Series Tachographs – Rear
Sealing Shroud Additional Requirement

White K-factor Label

GB (X)
Centre Number (XXX)
Cross Through
Must Be Entered Imp/km

K-factor Label with


Plastic Overlay
Applied on top

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 149

Sealing for the 8300 and 8400 Series Tachographs –


Calibration Switch Cover

ƒ The DIL switches require sealing after


calibration

ƒ Sealing must be carried out using a


black plastic cover - a clear plastic
cover MUST NOT be used GB (X)
(XXX

Imp/km

ƒ The cover is inserted into place and


moved upwards. The red seal locks it
into place. It is essential that the seal
is inserted into the hole and fully
pushed home

ƒ Similarly to the rear shroud, as a VOSA


requirement, a K-factor label and
protective overlay must be placed over
the fitted calibration switch cover seam
as shown
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 150
Sealing for the 8300 and 8400 Series Tachographs – Other
Seals

ƒ Red Plastic Seal is used to seal the Tachograph

ƒ A special pair of sealing pliers are required to de-boss these seals with the
Approved Tachograph Centre number

ƒ It should be noted that it is NOT possible to use the sealing pliers as used for
lead seals for de-bossing the red plastic seals

ƒ Grey/White Jack Socket Seal

ƒ This seal is not a legal seal and does not therefore have to be embossed with
an Approved Tachograph Centre number. Slightly larger than the red seal, it
is used to cover the jack plug socket that is used for Tachograph Self Test, K-
factor tests and reprogramming of the 8400 Tachograph

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 151

Data Plate Label – 8300, 8400 & 2400

ƒ The Data Plate Label is factory fitted and gives the specification details of
the Tachograph

ƒ When the unit is calibrated, the exact K-factor in impulses per kilometre
is recorded on the data plate, or on a K-factor label and affixed to the
Data Plate Label in the space provided

ƒ The K-factor recorded value must be protected by a plastic coverlay

K-factor Label With


6872 Plastic Overlay Applied
on top of Label

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 152
Installation Plaque – 8300 & 8400

ƒ After a Tachograph system has


been installed or re-calibrated, an
installation plaque should be
completed

ƒ The label and a protective


coverlay must be positioned
carefully, with the recommended
position being inside the front
case of the Tachograph as shown

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 153

Sealing Requirements for the 2400 Series Tachograph

ƒ All electrical connections are made at the rear of the 2400 Tachograph using
industry standard AMP Mini-timer type connectors
ƒ There is no requirement to fit a rear connector sealing shroud if the 2400 is
paired to an encrypted sender. Note: must fit if speed limiter is 2400 driven
ƒ For non-encrypted sender types, a sealing shroud must be used at all times
ƒ Only the A and B sockets are sealed because only these have signal
connections that require protection from tampering
ƒ The shroud is then held in place by a red seal that has been embossed with the
appropriate Approved Tachograph Centre number prior to fitting
ƒ It is a VOSA requirement that the rear shroud must also be secured with a
completed K-factor label and protective overlay in the same manner as was
described for the 8400 rear connector shroud

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 154
Sealing the 2400 Tachograph Programming Socket

ƒ After programming the 2400 Tachograph the socket must be sealed with
a cover clip and standard red seal that has been embossed with the
appropriate Approved Centre number as shown

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 155

Factory Seals for the 2400 Tachograph

ƒ The 2400 Tachograph uses 6 manufacturer red seals to seal its side cases
and to prevent unauthorised opening of the Tachograph

ƒ These manufacturer seals must never be removed

ƒ If any of the seals are missing or have been tampered with in any way,
then this invalidates the Tachograph warranty

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 156
2400 Data Plate Label

ƒ The 2400 Tachograph Data Plate Label


is factory fitted and gives specification
details of the Tachograph

ƒ When the Tachograph is calibrated, the


exact K-factor in impulses per kilometre
should be recorded on a K-factor label.
2400 Data Plate Label
The K-factor label should be fixed to
the Data Plate Label in the space
provided also as shown. The K-factor K-factor Label With
label recorded value must be protected Plastic Overlay Applied
by covering the completed label with a on top of Label
blue edged plastic adhesive overlay as 6872
described previously for the 8400
Tachograph

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 157

2400 Installation plaque

ƒ After a 2400 Tachograph system has been installed or re-calibrated, an


installation plaque should be completed with the usual details, i.e.
Tachograph Centre name and address, W and L-factors, calibration date and
Sealing Number of the Approved Centre. The label and a protective coverlay,
7955-111, must be positioned carefully on the front panel of the Tachograph

Cover clip fitted and red


seal embossed with the
Approved Centre number

Installation Plaque and


K-factor label and plastic Protective Overlay are
overlay applied on top of Applied Here
Data Label

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 158
Sealing & Plaques – Mechanical Tachograph System

ƒ The Mechanical Drive Line must be sealed


ƒ The number of seals required on each installation will vary depending on
the complexity of the fitting. If the fitting contains a 2-speed converter, or
a remote fitted Triplex corrector box or an intermediate cable, these will
require extra sealing. However, considering a standard simple fitting, the
essential seals are as follows,
• The Tachograph head to the Flex drive nut
• The Flex drive nut and Triplex corrector box
• The Triplex corrector box itself
• The Triplex corrector box to the gearbox through adaptors
ƒ The method of sealing is to feed sealing wire through appropriate holes in
the components then through a lead seal and fasten the seal to the wire
using sealing pliers. The wire should always be pulled taut before sealing
with the lead seal
ƒ Where an appropriate hole does not exist, a hole must be drilled to
accept the sealing wire
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 159

Sealing & Plaques – Mechanical Tachograph System

ƒ When sealing a corrector box to the vehicle gearbox, use should be made of
casing screws on the corrector box which have through-drilled holes in
them. Some corrector boxes have moulded lugs in the casing, which are
suitable sealing holes. If no sealing hole exists on a gearbox, one should be
created by drilling a hole through the head of a suitably located screw on
the gearbox or through a nearby rib on the gearbox

ƒ Feed the sealing wire through the drilled hole in the gearbox screw, through
the hole in the adaptor and onto the correcting box

ƒ Pieces of equipment which use the straight through drive of a triplex box
such as chassis lubricators, etc. do NOT require sealing. However, should
any extra equipment be on the Tachograph drive line, then these MUST
be appropriately sealed

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 160
Sealing & Plaques – Mechanical Tachograph System

ƒ Sealing a Triplex Box on the Gearbox,

• The drive cable must be sealed to the rear of the Tachograph


and to the output of the triplex corrector box, the corrector box
must be sealed to the gearbox and the corrector box itself must
be sealed

ƒ Sealing a Two Speed Converter in the Drive Line,

• The drive cable must be sealed to the rear of the Tachograph


and to the output side of the two speed converter. A second
drive cable must be sealed to the input of the two speed
converter and also to the output of the triplex corrector box.
Again the corrector box must be sealed to the gearbox and the
corrector box itself must be sealed

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 161

Sealing & Plaques – Mechanical Tachograph System – Sealing


Corrector Boxes

ƒ Corrector Box Information Tabs,


• The corrector box information tabs contain the calibration
information relating to correction ratio and gears required.
This information is stamped on the tab

ƒ Triplex boxes can be sealed by one of two methods -


• Method 1: The box is sealed utilising cross-drilled screws A and B.
Use screw B to retain the information tab
• Method 2: The box is sealed using two moulded lugs that are on
the box casing, with the information tab secured in the same was as
for method 1

ƒ 4-Gear Corrector boxes can be sealed using sealing wire attached between
screw A on the top end cap and screw A on the bottom end cap. The
corrector box may be sealed to the vehicle gearbox by using either screw B
or screw C on the bottom end cap

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 162
Sealing & Plaques – Inside the Mechanical Tachograph

ƒ On opening the Tachograph, a plastic rear cover secured by screws can be


seen. To prevent any unauthorised access to the internal parts of the
instrument, one of the screws retaining the plastic rear cover and one of the
screws retaining the metal odometer housing are covered by a lead seal. The
seals are marked in the factory with an appropriate manufacture symbol,
typically V/R

ƒ To provide a true record of distance travelled by a vehicle when a


replacement Tachograph is fitted, Approved Tachograph centres may be
required to advance the odometer roll to the final reading of the previously
installed Tachograph

ƒ When the odometer is placed back in the Tachograph, the screw should be
re-sealed using a new red seal. A previous odometer reading label 6955-557
should be placed on the odometer housing showing the reading to which the
new odometer has been set

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 163

Sealing & Plaques – Inside the Mechanical Tachograph

ƒ Having carried out the calibration procedure as defined previously, the


following information must be recorded on a calibration label,
• The name and address of the Approved Tachograph Centre that
carried out the calibration procedure
• The Vehicle W-factor, which will be in revolutions per km (U/km) for a
mechanical system - score out the ‘Imp/km’ unit as it does not apply
• The Vehicle L-factor, measured in mm
• The Date on which the calibration took place
• The Seal number of the Approved Tachograph Centre that carried out
the calibration

ƒ A Stoneridge calibration label is designed to fit inside the Tachograph on the


inner rim of the rear case. It is important that the calibration label should not
be applied to the plastic rear cover within the Tachograph as free rotation of
the chart may be prevented if the label or overlay is wrinkled or not
properly fixed along its edges
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 164
Documentation – Paperwork for Registration

ƒ When a vehicle has been calibrated, the Tachograph fitted, and the whole
installation sealed, the appropriate paperwork for the installation has to be
made out for record purposes. This paperwork consists of a Tachograph
Record Sheet, any test charts generated during the procedure and the
updating of the official VOSA Register of Tachograph Plaques Issued, GV212

ƒ The Tachograph Record sheet is traditionally in the form of a duplicate sheet.


The top sheet is handed to the customer with all the calibration information
and serves as a record of the calibration and sealing since the record contains
the Approved Tachograph centre number that is marked on their seals. The
duplicate copy, which is of a stiffer material, is retained by the Approved
Tachograph centre and has a slot cut into it to accommodate any test charts
generated during the procedure so that the paperwork for that vehicle can be
kept together. An example of the Stoneridge Tachograph record sheet is
shown below,

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 165

Documentation – Tachograph Record Sheet

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 166
Documentation – Tachograph Record Sheet Information

ƒ 6-Yearly Calibration of a Vehicle (Mechanical & Analogue Systems) or Any


Digital Tachograph Inspection or Any New Tachograph Installation:

ƒ A record sheet must contain the following information. Completion of each of


the fields is dependant on the type of Tachograph being calibrated,

• Vehicle registration number

• Date the work was carried out

• Customer's name and address

• Vehicle make

• Tyre pressures

• Tyre size and make


© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 167

Documentation – Tachograph Record Sheet Information

• Serial number of the Tachograph relating to the named vehicle

• Signature of the approved Tachograph technician who carried out the


work

• Name and address of the Approved Tachograph Centre where the work
was carried out

• Sealing number of the Approved Tachograph Centre

• Effective circumference of the vehicle drive wheel tyres, L-factor

• Characteristic co-efficient of the vehicle, W-factor

• Calibration switches settings where applicable

• Corrector box gears required where applicable

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 168
Documentation – Tachograph Record Sheet Information

ƒ 2 Year Inspection on Mechanical and Analogue Systems,


• Vehicle registration number
• Customer's name and address and the date the work was carried out
• Vehicle make
• Tyre pressures, size and make
• Serial number of the Tachograph relating to the named vehicle
• Signature of the approved Tachograph technician who carried out the work
• Name and address of the Approved Tachograph Centre where the work was
carried out
• Effective circumference of the vehicle drive wheel tyres, L-factor, as is currently
recorded on the Tachograph installation plaque
• Effective circumference of the vehicle drive wheel tyres, L-factor as per the
current 2-year inspection
• Renewal date for the next 2-year inspection
Note: this is usually 2-years exactly from the date of the current 2-year
inspection but the date recorded must not come after the due date for
the next 6-year inspection
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 169

Documentation – Tachograph Record Sheet Information

ƒ Minor Repairs to a Mechanical or Analogue Tachograph System,

• Vehicle registration number

• Customer's name and address and the date the work was carried out

• Vehicle make

• Tyre size and make

• Serial number of the Tachograph relating to the named vehicle

• Signature of the approved Tachograph technician who carried out the work

• Name and address of the Approved Tachograph Centre where the work was
carried out

• Brief details of the Minor repair carried out

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 170
Documentation – Test Charts

ƒ Any test charts that are used during a procedure to check a Tachograph
installation should be retained by the Approved Tachograph Centre and
kept with the Tachograph Record Sheet. Information on any test chart
generated should include,
• Chart identification, i.e. record that it is a test chart
• Name of the Technician who carried out the work
• Vehicle registration
• Tachograph make and serial number
• Date the test chart was generated
• Tachograph odometer recording at the start of the test
• Tachograph odometer recording at the end of the test
• Total distance covered during the test

ƒ Test charts should have the appropriate speed and distance traces and
duty mode traces recorded in accordance with the legislation. Test
charts should be created during a 2-year check, a 6-year check and a
Tachograph system recalibration. They should be retained in the
same manner regardless of which procedure is carried out
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 171

Documentation –
Official Register of Tachograph Plaques Issued GV212

ƒ The Vehicle and Operator Services Agency, VOSA, require that each
Approved Tachograph Centre generate record sheets for all Tachograph work
carried out by that centre

ƒ The VOSA register of Tachograph Plaques Issued, form GV212, is a detailed


log of Tachograph work carried out. Individual vehicle details and details of
the work carried out on that vehicle MUST be recorded on a GV212 form.
GV212 forms must be kept in a secure place for at least 6 years and be
made available for inspection by VOSA officials. Five categories of work are
available and one of the following five should be assigned to each job logged

• Initial Calibrations (I)


• Re-Calibrations (R)
• 2 year Checks (2)
• Minor Repairs (M)
• 6 Year Checks (6)

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 172
Documentation –
Official Register of Tachograph Plaques Issued GV212

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 173

Documentation – Minor Work Procedure

ƒ Minor work applies only to vehicles that are submitted for repair with all seals
intact on an analogue or mechanical Tachograph system. Should any seal be
broken then a full calibration and re-seal would be required

ƒ Minor work allows a Tachograph Centre to repair and re-seal any part of an
analogue or mechanical Tachograph system. The Approved Tachograph
Centre number and date must be entered on a minor work label 6955-561,
which is placed inside the Tachograph and covered with a protective overlay
6955-562. Details of the repair must be recorded on a Tachograph record
sheet and retained for 6 years

ƒ From July 2005 VOSA decreed that replacement Tachographs could not be
carried out under minor work. When fitting any replacement Tachograph the
full calibration procedure must be carried out

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 174
Documentation – Minor Work Procedure - Recording

ƒ A Tachograph record sheet must be completed for every minor repair. The
record sheet is the ideal method of recording the work that was done and for
storing any test charts generated

ƒ VOSA or the police can ask for these records at any time and a Tachograph
Centres’ authorisation may be at risk if their Technicians fail to make and
keep these records

ƒ VOSA requires that all Tachograph work carried out should be included on the
GV212 form ‘Register of Tachograph Installation Plaques Issued’. Minor work
repairs should be recorded on this form and identified by the letter 'M‘

ƒ In the past it has been highlighted that some Approved Tachograph Centres
have not recorded Minor repairs on the GV 212 form, so that proper records
were not being kept in some cases

ƒ It is a VOSA REQUIREMENT that procedures are fully understood and


complied with
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 175

Any Questions?

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 176
Combined Analogue & Digital
Tachograph Course
Day 2

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 177

Day 2

ƒ 08:30 Exam Results, Questions from yesterday


ƒ 08:40 Using the 1100 & 1400 Tachographs
ƒ 10:00 Tea Break
ƒ 10:15 Using the 8300 & 8400 Tachographs
ƒ 12:30 Lunch
ƒ 13:00 The MKII Programmer
ƒ 14:00 Using the MKII Programmer with the 8400 Tachograph
ƒ 15:00 Tea Break
ƒ 15:10 Exam – Practical Group 1
ƒ 15:30 Exam – Practical Group 2
ƒ 15:50 Questions?
ƒ 16:00 Exam – Written & Multiple Choice
ƒ 16:30 Finish

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 178
Section 2.1

Using The 1100 Mechanical


Tachograph

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 179

The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph - Introduction

ƒ The Veeder-Root 1100 Series Mechanical Tachograph was the first


developed in the 1970’s

ƒ The 1100 was initially used in the U.K. to meet the requirement of the U.K.
retrofit programme of 1980 and 1981 and as a result, a great many
mechanical Tachographs were fitted to U.K. registered vehicles

ƒ The 1100 Tachograph was similar in design to existing mechanical drive


circular speedometers of that time i.e. it utilised a mechanical flexible
rotating shaft drive cable that is connected between the gearbox rotating
shaft output and the rear of the Tachograph. The mechanical cable
connected to the rear of the Tachograph is used to drive the mechanical
speed and distance measuring systems within the instrument

ƒ An electrical supply to the 1100 Tachograph is required, but only to power


the clock and lamps

ƒ Production of 1100 Tachographs stopped in the early 1990s


© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 180
The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – Standard Model

ƒ The standard model was the 1111 model, an example will be shown later

ƒ This unit has all the functions and features required of a Tachograph by law

ƒ It was supplied as a dual-driver device, approved for installation on all


vehicles, including dangerous goods vehicles

ƒ The EU type approval number for a 1111 Mechanical Tachograph is


e11-0011

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 181

The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – Automatic Model

ƒ The 1100 was also produced in automatic form, under the model number
1116 Tachograph

ƒ The difference between the standard and automatic models is in the


method of operation of the driver duty mode switch, the duty trace on the
chart, and hence the type of chart

ƒ Principally, an automatic Mechanical Tachograph eliminates the need to


switch between drive (‘3’) and other work (‘1’) using the driver's duty
knob. A Veeder-Root automatic Mechanical Tachograph will not switch
automatically between either active work (‘4’) or rest (‘2’) and drive (‘3’),
so the driver must take care to set the switch to ‘other work’ (‘1’) for
successful automatic operation

ƒ The 1116 and 1111 Mechanical Tachographs are otherwise the same unit

ƒ The EU type approval number for a 1116 Mechanical Tachograph is


e11-0016
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 182
The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – Front View

Lock

Crew Duty Knob Driver Duty Knob

Road Speed
Warning Light

Clock

Speed Pointer Clock Tell-Tale

Odometer

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 183

The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – Rear View

Mechanical Drive Input

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 184
The Mechanical Tachograph – Competitors Unit - Kienzle 1311

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 185

The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – General Description

ƒ Speed is displayed on the front of the Tachograph by a speedometer needle


indicating against a circular speed scale. The range of this scale is from 0 to
140 km/h on a 1100 Mechanical Tachograph

ƒ The clock is found on the front case of the Tachograph, offset to the right
of the centre. The clock indicates hours and minutes on a 12 hour face.
Successful clock operation is indicated by a clock 'tell-tale' indicator which is
a red and white disc that moves once every second

ƒ Distance travelled by a vehicle is indicated by the odometer in the lower


half of the front case. For all E.U. instruments, the distance, by law, must
be shown in kilometres. The odometer has a ‘tenths of kilometres’ wheel
which is a different colour to the other 6 wheels for easy identification

ƒ The 1100 Tachograph has a locking mechanism that is situated between


the duty switches. Once the Tachograph charts have been fitted the front
case must be closed and then locked. If the lock is not closed the
Tachograph will not operate correctly
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 186
The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – Road Speed Warning

ƒ The Road Speed Warning Light is a


facility which provides the driver with a
warning of when the vehicle exceeds a
road speed that has been preset by the
driver. When the vehicle exceeds the
preset speed, the light illuminates and
remains lit until the road speed drops
again below the preset speed

ƒ The driver sets the speed he wishes to


be warned of using the road speed
warning slide inside the Tachograph as
shown

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 187

The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – Clock Setting

ƒ Setting the clock is achieved by using the


square ‘clock adjusting’ key that is part of the
chart locking clamp. The key must be located
into the square in the slot next to the chart
table and rotated anti-clockwise as shown.
Never attempt to turn the clock
Mechanism by any other means than
using the key provided
ƒ The clock has a 12 hour display but a 24 hour
chart drive. It should be ensured that the
time on the 24 hour graduation at the
perimeter of the chart corresponds with the
correct time of day, i.e. a.m. or p.m. An
arrow on the curved edge of the clear plastic
moulding covering the crew stylus lines up
with the time to which the chart has been set
to allow a check to see if the time has been
set correctly on both the clock and the chart
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 188
The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – Driver & Crew Duty
Switches

ƒ The duty mode switch is the means by which the driver or co-driver sets
the Tachograph to record the type of duty they are about to undertake, i.e.
driving, driver only – (‘3’), working (‘4’), other work/available (‘1’) or
resting (‘2’). The knobs are marked ‘1’ for driver, and ‘2’ for crew

ƒ The 1111 Mechanical Tachograph is a standard Tachograph and thus the


switches must be set manually for all duty modes

ƒ The 1116 is an automatic Mechanical Tachograph and eliminates the need


to switch between drive (‘3’) and other work (‘1’) on the driver's duty knob

ƒ The knob must be rotated so that the appropriate symbol is lined up as


required against the ‘1’ for the driver or the ‘2’ for the co-driver

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 189

The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – Crew Chart Fitting

ƒ Open the Tachograph and remove the chart clamp by rotating it about one
1/8th of a turn anti-clockwise and remove any previous charts

ƒ If only one man operation is required, only a driver's chart needs to be fitted.
Assuming dual-driver operation is required, first complete the chart centrefield
information as described previously then insert the crew chart as shown. With
the printed side uppermost, slide the edge of the chart under the clear plastic
cover at the front of the rear case. The chart will curve and slide under the
crew stylus. Line up and fix the 2 locating holes in the chart centre field with
the 2 locating pins on the chart table. The pins are offset and of different size
to suit the holes in the chart, making it very difficult to fit the chart incorrectly

ƒ The co-driver or crew stylus is situated in the front case under a clear plastic
cover and a crew chart must be curved to meet this stylus. If a vehicle is
double-manned the crew chart must be inserted first. If the crew becomes
the driver and vice versa, the driver and crew must change the positions of
their charts in the Tachograph

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 190
The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – Driver Chart Fitting

ƒ First complete the chart centrefield information as described previously in


the section on charts. With the printed side of the chart uppermost, place
the driver’s chart on top of the crew chart and on top of the transparent
platform as shown. Again locate the chart over the pins

ƒ Replace the chart clamp and lock it by turning it up to the stop as shown.
It should be noted that this operation requires little effort and the chart
clamp should not be forced

ƒ At the end of the day or when changing vehicles, or drivers, the charts
should be removed from the Tachograph by reversing the above listed
process

ƒ The centrefield of any chart’s removed from the Tachograph at the end of
the day or journey should be completed by adding the relevant details

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 191

The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – Chart Fitting

Crew Chart Fitting Driver Chart Fitting Chart Clamp Fitting

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 192
The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – Driving the Tachograph
from the Vehicle Gearbox – Gearbox Adaptors

ƒ A basic drive system for a mechanical Tachograph consists of


• an adaptor at the vehicle gearbox
• a corrector gearbox to alter the revs/km relayed to the Tachograph
- which has a fixed K-factor of usually 1000 revs/km
• a length of mechanical drive cable

ƒ The connections on a gearbox rotating shaft output drive often vary


dependent on the make of vehicle and the type of gearbox. This
connection may therefore have to be converted to suit the DIN standard
connections for the corrector box and cable end, i.e. 3mm spade
connection with a M22 x 1.5mm pitch thread

ƒ This is done by fitting a gearbox adaptor, which will fit on to the existing
take-off rotating drive spindle, the output of which will then conform to the
DIN standard. A list of gearbox adaptors available from Stoneridge is given
in the training manual

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 193

The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – Driving the Tachograph


from the Vehicle Gearbox – Correction of the Vehicle Drive

ƒ The majority of mechanical Tachographs manufactured had a fixed K-factor


of 1000 revs/km. In all cases the K-factor was fixed at the factory

ƒ Unless the Tachograph had been specifically designed to suit one type of
vehicle only, then the W-factor of the vehicle is unlikely to match the K-
factor of the Tachograph. For the Tachograph to operate correctly in the
vehicle the 2 different values for W-factor and K-factor must be matched

ƒ In a mechanical Tachograph installation, the W-factor of the vehicle is


modified mechanically using a corrector gearbox in the driveline so that the
revs/km output from the corrector gearbox is equal to the revs/km required
at the input to the Tachograph i.e. matches to the fixed K-factor of the
Tachograph

ƒ The ratio of the corrector gearbox can be varied to suit a particular


installation by selecting different corrector gears

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 194
The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – Driving the Tachograph
from the Vehicle Gearbox – Correction of the Vehicle Drive

ƒ There are two types of corrector gearbox that can be used to match the vehicle
W-factor to the Tachograph K-factor as follows,

• Triplex Corrector Gearbox – these employ 3 gears with the input and
output gears determining the ratio and the middle 'idler' gear only used
to reverse the rotation. This design has the advantage of a ‘straight
through' output on the input shaft which can be used to drive a variety
of onboard devices which require a distance or speed related input e.g.
automatic chassis lubricator

• 4-Gear Corrector Gearbox – these employ 4 gears, 2 of which are on


the same shaft and are used to reverse the rotation. By varying the
number of teeth on these 2 gears, all 4 gears can affect the box ratio
and a greater variety of ratios can therefore be achieved by a 4-gear
corrector box than by a triplex box. This gives a potential for greater
accuracy. Unlike the triplex corrector gearbox, the gears are all on
fixed centres and the meshing conditions do not therefore
require adjustment
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 195

The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – Driving the Tachograph


from the Vehicle Gearbox – Corrector Gearbox Ratio

ƒ Before assembling a corrector gearbox it is necessary to establish the modifying


ratio required of the gearbox. The method of determining the exact ratio is the
same for either type of corrector gearbox

ƒ The procedure is as follows,


• Establish the vehicle W-factor using an approved method as described
previously
• Identify the K-factor of the Tachograph to be fitted to the vehicle. The
K-factor will be marked on the serial number label and is usually 1000
revs/km for Mechanical Tachographs
• To arrive at the correct ratio for the gearbox it is necessary to divide W-
factor expressed in revs/km by the K-factor also expressed in revs/km
• Example: W = 744 revs/km, K = 1000 revs/km
• Exact correcting value = W/K = 744/1000 = 0.744

ƒ This is usually expressed as a ratio in the form, i.e. 0.744:1


© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 196
The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – Driving the Tachograph
from the Vehicle Gearbox – Corrector Gearbox Ratio

ƒ Having established the exact ratio required for the gearbox, it is necessary
to select the correct gears to achieve this ratio. The tables in the Training
manual Mechanical Tachograph section - Appendix A for triplex and
Appendix B for a 4-gear corrector box - give the correct gear selections

ƒ It is not possible to achieve all ratios exactly. As was previously


highlighted, more ratios are available using a 4-gear corrector box.
However, both types of gearbox give sufficient accuracy within the
tolerances laid down for installation provided the nearest ratio in the tables
to the one required is selected

ƒ Where the required ratio falls approximately midway between 2 ratios in


the tables, it is best to select the higher ratio in the tables to allow for tyre
wear on the vehicle

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 197

The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – Driving the Tachograph


from the Vehicle Gearbox – Corrector Gearbox Ratio

ƒ Using the above example of a required ratio of 0.744:1,

• The triplex corrector gearbox tables give 2 ratios which are close to
the required ratio, these being 0.738:1 and 0.750:1. The required
ratio falls midway between the two and you should therefore select
the gears for the higher ratio of 0.750:1, which gives gears of,
A=40 B (position 2)=20 C=30

• The 4-gear corrector gearbox tables also give 2 possible ratios but
in this case the available ratios are much closer to the required
ratio. The tables give 0.7432:1 or 0.7449:1 as options and the
closer option is to select the gears for a 0.7449:1 ratio, which gives
gears of,
A=23 B=31 C=38 D=21

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 198
The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – Driving the Tachograph
from the Vehicle Gearbox – Drive Cables

ƒ The purpose of the drive cable is to transmit the revolutions from the
gearbox, corrected via a corrector box, to the drive input of the Mechanical
Tachograph

ƒ In order to avoid transmission errors and fluctuations which could affect the
performance of the Tachograph it is important that great care is taken in
the design, manufacture and installation of drive cables

ƒ The inner cable consists of fine strands of high tensile wire bound together
with alternative layers of left and right hand winding with the outer layer
bound with a left lay. The outer cable is made from two formed steel strips
spirally wound and covered with a tough P.V.C. coating to absorb the
weathering and vibration expected in a commercial vehicle. The shaft ends
are made from steel and the ferrules from extruded steel. The nuts and
connectors are made from a mixture of materials, some being plastic,
others aluminium and steel

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 199

The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – Driving the Tachograph


from the Vehicle Gearbox – Drive Cables

ƒ The responsibility for assembling these components into an effective and


reliable drive cable of the required design rests with the Tachograph
technician. Once the drive cable is installed in the vehicle, the technician
must ensure that the Tachograph operation is satisfactory and must make
any adjustments to the cable installation as necessary

ƒ The Training manual Mechanical Tachograph section fully describes the


equipment required, the skills involved in preparing and assembling the
drive cable and the installation of the drive cable, including how to establish
the length of cable to be manufactured for a vehicle installation

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 200
The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph – Driving the Tachograph
from the Vehicle Gearbox – Drive Cable Installation

ƒ No part of the installed cable should have a bend radius of less than 20cm
ƒ Cable runs should miss chassis cross members, or parts of the vehicle that due
to movement, or loading of the vehicle could either trap or chafe the drive cable
ƒ Cable run should be clipped to vehicle chassis, or bulkhead at least every 60cm
ƒ On leaving a component, e.g. Tachograph, corrector gearbox, etc., the drive
cable should run straight for at least 8cm before the start of a bend
ƒ In the case of tilt cabs, care must be taken to ensure that there is sufficient
freedom of movement on the drive cable when opening and closing the cab and
at the same time avoiding floating as much as possible
ƒ For long cable runs, e.g. 11 metres plus, the drive cable should be made up in
several sections joined by adaptors. The centre section or sections should be
as long as possible but not greater than 5 metres each. The end sections to the
gearbox output or corrector box and to the Tachograph head drive input
should be kept as short as possible
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 201

The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph –


System Installation Procedure

ƒ Initially, a calibration of the vehicle should be carried out to establish the


vehicle calibration parameters

ƒ The corrector gearbox ratio required should be established and the chosen
type of corrector gearbox should be assembled with the correct gears as
discussed previously

ƒ Next, the required mechanical drive cable run should be designed and
manufactured using the methods discussed previously

ƒ The Tachograph to be fitted should be bench tested to ensure satisfactory


operation before installing it in the vehicle

ƒ Fit the corrector gearbox in the planned location on the vehicle – preferably
on the vehicle gearbox itself, but close by, if direct fitting is not possible

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 202
The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph –
System Installation Procedure

ƒ Test the drive cable for freedom of movement of the inner cable and for
adequate end float. Lightly grease the cable ends and install the drive
cable in the vehicle to the previously planned route

ƒ Install the Tachograph

ƒ Once the installation of the Mechanical system into the vehicle is completed
the system installation must be checked by testing the operation of the
Tachograph system

ƒ If operation of the newly installed system is satisfactory the system must be


sealed and the required documentation completed as was described
previously

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 203

The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph –


Checking the System Installation

ƒ It is a VOSA requirement to prove that a Tachograph installation is correct by


carrying out a Tachograph test after installation into a vehicle

ƒ The procedure for testing a Mechanical Tachograph that has been installed in a
vehicle is as follows:

• Switch off the vehicle ignition & check that the clock indicator is turning

• Switch on ignition, switch on the vehicle sidelights and check that the
Tachograph dial lights are illuminated

• Drive the vehicle onto a rolling-road and accelerate the vehicle on the
rolling road rollers until the speed reading on the rolling road console is
50 km/h. Hold the speed at 50 km/h and check that the Tachograph
displays a speed of 50 km/h ±4 km/h. Decelerate the vehicle to a stop
and check that the Tachograph speed returns to zero

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 204
The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph –
Fault Finding the System Installation

ƒ Since the speed stylus is directly connected to the speed pointer on the
Tachograph the performance of the pointer will give an indication of the quality
of the chart recordings being produced. Therefore, when checking the
Tachograph installation it is necessary to observe the pointer function to
ascertain what corrections may be necessary to obtain satisfactory recordings

ƒ When checking the operation of a Mechanical drive installation the following


table will indicate possible faults and reasons so that the appropriate checks
can be made:

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 205

The 1100 Mechanical Tachograph –


Fault Finding the System Installation

Fault Reason

1. There are tight bends in the drive cable.


2. The corrector gearbox gears are tight.
3. The drive cable is pulled tight at the gearbox (i.e. the
Pointer Shudder cable is too short or far too long).
4. The drive cable is pulled tight at the Tachograph
(noisy instrument).
5. There is a tight loop in the drive cable.

1. The drive cable is unsupported (cable floating).


2. Snag on the drive cable inner cable is causing ‘wind
up’.
Pointer Sweep 3. The two speed converter is sticking – this can result
in ‘spikes’ on the Tachograph chart.
4. The drive cable is unclipped.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 206
Section 2.2

Using The 1400 Electronic


Tachograph

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 207

The Electronic Tachograph – Introduction

ƒ Electronic Tachographs were first produced by Veeder-Root in 1980. The initial


model was the 1200 Series Tachograph. Although because the initial Electronic
Tachographs were very similar to Mechanical Tachographs in terms of their
appearance, the driver operation and the records made on a paper chart, they
initially tended to be referred to as ‘the Electronic Tachograph’ to distinguish
them from similar looking Mechanical models. The main difference between the
early Electronic and Mechanical Tachographs was that the rotating shaft drive
and corrector box of the mechanical system was replaced by an electronic
sender unit and a 4-core electrical cable to drive the Electronic Tachograph
ƒ In April 1984, the 1400 series Tachograph was introduced to replace the 1200
series Tachograph. The 1400 incorporated many improvements and extra
features against the 1200 series Tachograph. Although from a driver’s point of
view, again the appearance and basic operation was still very similar to the 1100
Mechanical Tachograph
ƒ Note that, in spite of the similar appearance between early Electronic
Tachographs and older Mechanical Tachographs, the charts are not
interchangeable between Electronic and Mechanical versions
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 208
The Electronic Tachograph – Introduction

ƒ In Electronic Tachograph systems, the elimination of Mechanical corrector


gearboxes, which match the vehicle gearbox output to the fixed K-factor of the
Mechanical Tachograph, meant that another method was required for matching
the gearbox output to the Electronic Tachograph. Matching was achieved
electronically by setting calibration switches in the Tachograph, with each
combination of switches representing a different Tachograph K-factor

ƒ Elimination of the corrector box and mechanical drive cable offers considerable
advantages to the Distributor and the end user. Also, the Electronic Tachograph
is capable of producing many output signals which can be used to control other
equipment on the vehicle. For some models, direct transfer of data such as
speed and distance etc. to on-board computers or data loggers is possible. This
enables Tachograph data to be used for fleet management purposes without the
need to read the chart. Nevertheless, the chart still has great importance as it is
the official legal record of driver's hours

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 209

The Electronic Tachograph –


Benefits Compared to Mechanical Tachographs
ƒ Quicker Installation - Because installation of the sender and cable is not critical
in terms of bend radius or length it is technically feasible to provide a small
range of ready made sender and cable assemblies. This reduces the installation
time by eliminating the cable assembly operation necessary for a Mechanical
Tachograph system. Time is also saved because the run of the electric cable is
not critical and cannot produce 'needle swing', nor is there a minimum bend
radius limitation
ƒ Reduced Vehicle Downtime - Because any length of sender cable may be used
between the sender unit and the Electronic Tachograph, extra cable may be left
at the vehicle gearbox end. This allows the gearbox to be removed to replace a
clutch, for example, without breaking any seals in the Tachograph system. As a
result vehicle downtime and therefore cost is minimised for the operator
ƒ Reduced Calibration Costs - With an Electronic Tachograph, calibration is
achieved by setting switches in the Tachograph. This eliminates the cost of
new gears etc. which would be necessary on a Mechanical Tachograph system,
should adjustment be required to achieve legal standards of accuracy

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 210
The Electronic Tachograph – Benefits Compared to Mechanical
Tachographs

ƒ Reduced Maintenance Costs - Mechanical drive cables are subject to wear and
tear and damage during maintenance etc. The electric sender-cable is
maintenance free and therefore reduces maintenance costs

ƒ Reduced Inventory - As calibration of Electronic Tachographs requires no


parts, inventory of gears etc may be reduced. In the UK in 1998,
approximately 95% of all Tachographs in the field were of the electronic type
and since then the number of Mechanical systems has steadily declined

ƒ Outputs as Standard - Electronic Tachographs take a signal produced by the


electronic sender unit, which is driven by the vehicle gearbox, and processes
it to produce the vehicle road speed and distance outputs. These outputs are
used to drive motors to actuate the styli which in turn make traces on the
Tachograph chart. The speed and distance outputs are also made available
via the connections on the back of the Tachograph to control, or pass data to,
other vehicle mounted equipment such as speed limiters, automatic chassis
lubrication, computers and data loggers, etc

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 211

The 1400 Electronic Tachograph – Front View

Lock

Crew Duty Knob Driver Duty Knob

Road Speed
Warning Light

Clock

Clock Tell-Tale
Speed Pointer

Odometer

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 212
The 1400 Electronic Tachograph – Rear View

Auxiliary Cable Sockets

Sender Cable Input

Power Cable Input

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 213

The 1400 Electronic Tachograph – Model Variants

ƒ 1401 / 1406 – These are standard and automatic versions of the 1400 series
Tachograph respectively. These versions only work with a Veeder-Root 2
pulse/rev sender. When the 1400 series was first introduced, the 1406
automatic Electronic Tachograph was fitted as a regular production option by
all UK vehicle manufacturers except Ford where a standard mechanical model
was standard specification. All 1406 models are directly interchangeable but
some incorporate special cosmetic features such as special dial graphics and
lighting, long duty knobs and keys
ƒ 1416 – This version was the first Veeder-Root electronic Tachograph which
would work with the Kienzle 8 pulses/rev impulse generator and produce a
proportional speed output equivalent to that found on the C3 terminal of the
Kienzle 1314 series Electronic Tachographs
ƒ 1426 – This version combined all the features of the 1406 and 1416 models.
It was known as the 'Universal' automatic Tachograph because it works with
either a Veeder-Root 2 pulse/rev sender or an 8 pulse/rev impulse generator.
This is achieved simply by selecting different pin connections on the
Tachograph 'B' sender socket
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 214
The 1400 Electronic Tachograph – General Description

ƒ The Speed is displayed on the front of the Tachograph by a speedometer


needle indicating against a circular speed scale. The range of this scale is
from 0 to 125 km/h for the variant of 1400 shown
ƒ The clock is found on the front case of the Tachograph, offset to the right of
the centre. The clock indicates hours and minutes on a 12 hour face.
Successful clock operation is indicated by a clock 'tell-tale' indicator which is
a red and white disc that moves once every second. Clock setting uses the
same method as was described previously for an 1100 Tachograph
ƒ Distance travelled by a vehicle is indicated by the odometer in the lower half
of the front case. For all E.U. instruments, the distance, by law, must be
shown in kilometres. The odometer has a ‘tenths of km’s’ wheel which is a
different colour to the other 6 wheels for easy identification
ƒ The 1400 Tachograph has a locking mechanism that is situated between the
duty switches. Once the Tachograph charts have been fitted the front case
must be closed and then locked. If the lock is not closed the
Tachograph will not operate correctly
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 215

The 1400 Electronic Tachograph – Chart Fitting

ƒ The method for Chart fitting for a 1400 Tachograph is identical to that for an
1100 Mechanical Tachograph as was described previously and is shown below

Crew Chart Fitting Driver Chart Fitting Chart Clamp Fitting

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 216
The 1400 Electronic Tachograph –
Sender Cable Connections to the Tachograph

ƒ The connections for a 1400 Tachograph sender input Rear ‘B’ connector 5-pin
socket are as listed in the table below. Pin 2 is only used when connecting to
an 8-pulse sender for 1416 or 1426 models and pins 4 and 5 are only used
when connecting to a 2-pulse sender for 1401, 1406 or 1426 models. A full
description of all Tachograph rear connections is included in Appendix A of
the 1400 Tachograph section in the Training manual

SOCKET B DESCRIPTION
Pin 1 Ground (negative supply to sender)

Pin 2 8-pulses per rev input signal

Pin 3 +12 Volt (positive supply to sender)

Pin 4 2-pulses per rev channel 1 input signal

Pin 5 2-pulses per rev channel 2 input signal

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 217

The 1400 Electronic Tachograph – Calibration Switches

ƒ The vehicle should be calibrated using an approved method as was previously


described. When the vehicle ‘W-factor’ calibration parameter has been
determined this value should be matched to the ‘K-factor’ calibration
parameter for the Tachograph

ƒ The K-factor for a 1400 Electronic Tachograph is set using the bank of 8
calibration DIL switches that are accessed by opening the Tachograph. In a
sealed system the calibration switches are covered by a sealed calibration
switch cover, which can be removed by breaking the seal to expose the
switches as shown

ƒ The switch settings for a required K-factor value may be determined using the
MKII programmer DIL calculate function. Alternatively they may be found
using the calibration look-up tables as shown in Appendix D of the Training
Manual 1400 Tachograph section. The required W-factor value should be
looked up in the table and the corresponding DIL switch settings should be
read from the next column of the table

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 218
The 1400 Electronic Tachograph – Calibration Switches

ƒ For example, if the vehicle W-factor was found


to be 860 revs/km, the nearest W-factor
available in the table is 862 revs/km. For the
1400 Tachograph to operate accurately in this
vehicle the 8 calibration switches should be set
as follows
↓↓↓↓↓↑↓↑

ƒ Note: The 8 calibration switches can be set UP


or DOWN as required – make sure each of the
switches is fully pressed down into the required
position. Use a small screwdriver or other thinly
pointed instrument to set the DIL switches as
required

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 219

The 1400 Electronic Tachograph – Checking the System


Installation

ƒ It is a VOSA requirement to prove that a Tachograph installation is correct by


carrying out a Tachograph test after the installation into a vehicle

ƒ The procedure for testing a 1200/1400 Electronic Tachograph that is installed in


a vehicle is as follows,
• Switch off the vehicle ignition and check that the clock indicator is
turning
• Switch on ignition, switch on the vehicle sidelights and check that the
Tachograph dial lights are illuminated
• Drive the vehicle onto a rolling-road and accelerate the vehicle on the
rolling road rollers until the speed reading on the rolling road console is
50 km/h. Hold the speed at 50 km/h and check that the Tachograph
displays a speed of 50 km/h ±4 km/h. Decelerate the vehicle to a stop
and check that the Tachograph speed returns to zero. If a rolling-road
is not available the vehicle must be road tested to ensure the
Tachograph responds to vehicle speed changes
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 220
The 1400 Electronic Tachograph – Output Signals

ƒ One of the main advantages of Electronic Tachographs over equivalent


Mechanical versions is that Electronic Tachographs are capable of producing
output signals which can be used to control other equipment on the vehicle.
Output signals available from a 1400 Tachograph are as follows,
ƒ Low-Speed Output - The low-speed switch operates at 8 km/h and can be used
to control automatic door closing on P.S.V.'s. Pin A2 on the rear connector is
used for this output. Because the output from the Tachograph is not adequate
to control equipment directly, a changeover relay with built-in amplifier will be
required
ƒ Distance Output - This output is available on 1400 Tachographs only via Pin A3
of the rear connectors. This output changes its logic level every half metre. It
is an open-collector output and the output transistor will sink 20mA over the full
temperature range. It is important to note that the output is not synchronous.
That is to say a batch of pulses is transmitted when the microprocessor has
time to do it. Therefore the time between pulses at constant road speed is not
fixed. However over a period of time, say one second, the error in the
frequency of the signal is negligible
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 221

The 1400 Electronic Tachograph – Output Signals

ƒ Speed Output (variable pulse width) - This output is available on Pin 3 of the D
connector and is directly equivalent to the Kienzle 1314 Tachograph C3 output.
The pulse output has the same pulse rate as the incoming pulses from the
sender unit, but the pulse width 'T' is a function of the vehicle W-factor setting.
The pulse width 'T' is generated automatically by the vehicle calibration
switches and has an accuracy of better than 1%
ƒ Serial Data Communications - The 1416 and 1426 Tachographs output a
comprehensive range of information, which can be used by peripheral
equipment. This data is output from Pins 1 and 4 of auxiliary socket D in the
form of a two-wire serial data communications transmission. The following data
is encoded within the transmitted message,
• W-factor, Speed, Distance, Overspeed indicator status, Overspeed
switch status, Zero speed switch status

ƒ Peripheral equipment receiving the data can extract the part or parts of the
message which they require

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 222
Section 2.3

Using The 8300 & 8400


Tachographs

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 223

The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Introduction and Differences

ƒ In 1987 the 8300 series Tachograph was introduced to meet the


requirements of the new, at that time, EU regulation 3821/85. It was a
more advanced version of circular analogue Tachograph than the 1400 series
Tachograph and also provided a Veeder-Root replacement for the
competitor’s equivalent, the Kienzle 1318 Tachograph. In 1991 the more
advanced 8400 series Tachograph was introduced to replace the 8300 series
Tachograph, an example is shown below

ƒ The 8300 Tachograph is visually and dimensionally identical to the 8400


Tachograph. However the 8400 Tachograph being a more modern design
uses more modern electronics, including a more advanced microcontroller,
and is thus much more efficient. The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs utilise the
microcontroller to perform the basic measurement, calculation and control
functions as well as ancillary signals and the options, which are included in
the higher specification versions of the Tachographs

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 224
The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Introduction and Differences

ƒ The later versions of 8300 Tachograph from serial number 730007 onwards,
and all 8400 Tachographs were also designed to perform to the basic
Tachograph requirements of the EC regulation, 3821/85, but also meet the
regulations for power disconnect and gearbox sender failure as per
amendments 3314/90, 3688/92 and 2479/95. The main differences in
operation due to these amendments are,
• The Tachograph will give a full scale deflection of the speed pointer
after a power interrupt

• The Tachograph speed pointer will deflect from 0 to 30 km/h every few
seconds during a ‘sender disconnect’ condition

ƒ The main functions of the 8300 & 8400 Tachographs are the same and these
are:
• To display and record speed, distance and driver duty

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 225

The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Introduction and Differences

ƒ Recent 8300, and all 8400 Tachographs must receive their speed signal from a
4-wire, 8-pulses per rev electronic gearbox sender
ƒ The calibration of the 8300 and 8400 Tachographs, the K-factor setting, is
achieved by means of a 10 position DIL switch bank
ƒ The 8300 uses a second bank of 10 DIL switches for engine revs bands and
overspeed setting and a third bank of 8 DIL switches is used for pulses per rev
setting. However, unlike the 8300, the 8400 Tachograph has electronically
programmable engine rev bands, overspeed, ignition-on-record and pulses-per-
rev settings, hence no second or third bank of DIL switches
ƒ The 8300 and 8400 Tachograph rear connections are identical with two
exceptions. For the 8300, pin A1 is used for the clock positive connection and
pin A4 is used for electronics positive connection. Whereas for the 8400, pin A1
is used for a combined clock and electronics positive connection and pin A4 is
not connected
ƒ All 8300 and 8400 Tachographs are fully automatic. Thus ‘drive’ mode
recording is achieved whenever a vehicle moves
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 226
The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Introduction and Differences

ƒ The EU type approval numbers for the 8300 Tachograph are e11-18 for 125
km/h and e11-19 for 140 km/h versions respectively

ƒ The EU type approval numbers for the 8400 Tachograph are e11-20 for 125
km/h, e11-21 for 140 km/h and e11-24 for and 180 km/h versions

ƒ The 8300 Tachograph is interchangeable with the 8400 series and similar
competitor Tachographs such as the Kienzle 1318 when used with a 4-wire
sender in non-dangerous goods vehicles.
Note: The 8300 series Tachographs were specifically designed for installation in
vehicles carrying hazardous goods. The 8300 is intrinsically safe and carries full
BASEEFA approval for use in hazardous goods vehicles when used in
conjunction with an 8300 safety network (barrier device). The 8400
Tachograph and 8400 barrier were approved by the LCIE as a system to the
[EExib] IIB standard. Barrier devices are NOT interchangeable

ƒ Production of the 8300 ceased in 2002. Stoneridge Replacement 8300


Tachographs and 8300 & 8400 barrier devices are no longer available
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 227

The 8400 Tachograph – Front View

Lock

Clock Tell-Tale

Speed Pointer
Clock

Chart Detect/
Over-speed
Odometer Warning Light

Crew Duty Knob Driver Duty Knob

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 228
The 8400 Tachograph – Rear View

Rear Connectors –

‘A’ – Voltage, White


D C B A
‘B’ – Vehicle Speed, Yellow

‘C’ – Engine Speed, Red

‘D’ – Auxiliary Signals, Brown

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 229

The 8300 & 8400 Tachograph - Competitors Unit, Kienzle1318

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 230
The 8300 & 8400 Tachograph – Other Competitor Units,
Kienzle1319 and Motometer EGK-100

Kienzle 1319 Motometer EGK 100


(Mercedes) (VOLVO)

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 231

The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Overspeed Warning Light

ƒ This is a multifunction indicator which shows the following,


ƒ Overspeed Indicator - This is set in the factory to illuminate at 80km/h. For an
8300 this is adjusted within the range 50 – 120 km/h by means of the DIL
switches. For an 8400, this setting can be easily re-programmed using a
Tachograph Programmer. Whenever the vehicle travels at a speed greater
than the set overspeed limit, the light will illuminate, and will remain
illuminated until the vehicle speed reduces to less than the set overspeed limit
ƒ Chart Detect Indicator - If no chart is fitted in the Tachograph, the warning
light will flash whenever the vehicle ignition is switched on. If the vehicle
ignition is switched off, the warning light will continue to flash for up to 30
hours after which the unit will switch into a power save mode. Fitting a chart
will cause the warning light to extinguish. Should the vehicle be driven with no
chart fitted, the warning light will flash continuously unless the overspeed
setting is reached at which point the light will remain on. Dropping below the
overspeed setting will start the warning light to flash again
ƒ Self Test Indicator - 8300 & 8400 Tachographs can initiate a self-test mode
with the aid of a shorted jack plug. The warning light indicates that
the self-test mode is active by flashing intermittently
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 232
The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Bulb Replacement

ƒ The glass envelope of the bulbs used in


an 8300 or 8400 Tachograph is an
integral part of the holder. The bulb is
retained in the housing with a bayonet
type fitting. To insert the bulb into the
Tachograph a quarter turn clockwise is
required as shown. The 8300 or 8400
Tachographs are voltage conscious
units, 12V or 24V. It is important that
the correct bulbs are used,

• 24Volt – GREY
Bulb Part Number: 6953-236

• 12Volt – BLACK
Bulb Part Number: 6953-237

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 233

The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Automatic Power Down

ƒ To minimise battery drain when the vehicle is left unattended for a


prolonged period, an 8300 or 8400 Tachograph will automatically go into a
Power Save mode after 30 hours of inactivity

ƒ In the Power Save mode all electronic functions of the Tachograph are de-
activated except for the clock, which remains operational and draws only a
very small current

ƒ Should a chart be fitted or the ignition be switched on, the Tachograph will
automatically re-activate itself out of the Power Save mode

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 234
The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Chart Fitting

ƒ The Tachograph chart is a record of the driver's activity and therefore each
driver and co-driver must have their own chart, which they must take with
them when they change vehicle. The instrument is designed so that the
driver's chart records duty mode, speed and distance, whilst the co-driver's
chart only records duty mode

ƒ If the vehicle is double manned, it is important that the charts are inserted
correctly and in sequence, i.e. co-driver first and main driver second. Also
if the co-driver takes over the driving duties and the driver becomes the co-
driver during the shift, their charts must also change places so that the new
driver can record speed and distance on his chart. If a dual-driver
Tachograph is to be used in a vehicle by a single driver then a plastic chart
(part number 6953-932) must be fitted instead of the co-driver chart prior
fitting the driver chart. If the plastic chart is not fitted chart detector light
will flash continuously as was described above

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 235

The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Chart Fitting

ƒ To fit the co-driver's chart the hinged chart separation plate must be lifted.
The chart, with the front, waxed, side uppermost is carefully slid under the
separation plate and positioned so that the pear shaped hole in the chart
aligns with the boss on the chart turntable. The chart is pushed down
gently and then the separation plate is returned to its operating position as
shown below

ƒ The driver's chart is placed front, waxed, side uppermost over the co-
driver's chart, or plastic chart if no co-driver chart is required, on top of the
separation plate as shown below. The chart is positioned so that the pear
shaped hole aligns with the chart turntable boss and then pushed gently
home. Having fitted the charts the front case should be closed and locked
by turning the key clockwise

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 236
The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Chart Fitting

Crew Chart Fitting Driver Chart Fitting

Co-Driver’s Chart Driver’s Chart

Chart Separation Plate

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 237

The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Clock Setting

ƒ A driver must ensure that the Tachograph clock


indicates the correct time before driving the
vehicle. Should adjustment be necessary, open
the Tachograph and rotate the thumb wheel, as
shown, in the direction of the arrow until the
time is accurately set

ƒ An 8300/8400 Tachograph clock displays time in


a 12 Hour format, whereas the Tachograph chart
records over a 24 Hour period. When setting the
time, it must be ensured that the chart time is
correct compared to the actual 24 Hour time.
For an 8300/8400 Tachograph the allowed
tolerance between the Tachograph displayed
time and the recorded chart time is ± 5 minutes.
If the clock hands have to be wound back always
take up gearing backlash by winding back 1 hour
before the required time and then forwards to
the correct time
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 238
The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Bench Testing

ƒ Before installing an 8300/8400 Tachograph, the unit must be bench tested to


ensure its operation is satisfactory prior to fitting. Semi-automatic Bench
testing of a Tachograph is possible using a MKII Tachograph programmer.
Full details of the procedure will be covered later

ƒ The Tachograph bench test can be carried out manually using the procedure
described below. The equipment required to carry out the procedure is a
D.C. power supply, an 8400 Power lead, part number 7952-595, and a
calibrated speed pulse source such as a Tachograph Head tester

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 239

The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Bench Test Procedure

ƒ Connect the Tachograph to the power supply, leave switched off at this stage,
using an 8400 power lead. Before starting the bench test it is essential to fit a
switch in the Ignition line, A3, and the 8400 power lead provides this

ƒ Ensure that all the manufacturers’ seals are intact. If they are not the
Tachograph must not be used in a vehicle

ƒ Adjust the calibration switch settings to correspond to the simulated W-factor


from the speed pulse source e.g. if the speed pulse source output is 8000
pulses/km, the Tachograph K-factor is also 8000 pulses/km and thus the 8400
calibration switches 2, 3 and 9 are ON with all others OFF

ƒ Connect the head tester, or equivalent, to the Tachograph, ensuring that the
speed output is set to zero before switching on

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 240
The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Bench Test Procedure

ƒ Set the Power Supply to the required voltage for the Tachograph, either 12V or
24V and switch ON. The Tachograph speed pointer will go to full-scale
deflection, and will only return to zero when charts are fitted and the front
case is closed and locked
ƒ Check that the Tachograph clock indicator tell-tale is stepping correctly and
that the bulbs are illuminated
ƒ Check the Tachograph clock accuracy using a clock tester
ƒ Complete the centre field information on 2 charts, indicating that they are test
charts and ensure that the Tachograph odometer reading is included. Insert
the charts in the driver and co-driver positions using the method as described
previously
ƒ Set both Tachograph driver duty knobs to work i.e. ‘4’
ƒ Carry out a sweep test to 120 km/h as shown on the head tester and then
rapidly decrease the speed to zero. This should create a radial line on the
speed trace section of the driver chart

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 241

The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Bench Testing

ƒ Open the Tachograph and check that the time for the radial speed recording
marked on the chart corresponds with the clock hands and also that the speed
trace went to 120 km/h on the chart
ƒ Close the Tachograph and using the head tester progressively adjust the
speed output so that the speed pointer on the Tachograph moves to the
speed scale markings at 40, 80 and 100km/h respectively. Hold each of these
speeds for a period of exactly 2 minutes and check that for each speed the
head tester and Tachograph readings are within the tolerance of +/-3 km/h
ƒ Rapidly decrease the head tester output speed to zero and check that the
Tachograph speed pointer returns to zero
ƒ With the head tester output speed at zero and the duty knobs still at ‘4‘
continue to record ‘work’ duty for 2 minutes exactly
ƒ With the head tester output speed still at zero, switch both duty knobs to ‘1‘
and record ‘available’ duty for a period of 2 minutes exactly

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 242
The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Bench Test Procedure

ƒ With the head tester output speed still at zero, switch both duty knobs to ‘2‘
and record ‘rest’ duty for a period of 2 minutes exactly

ƒ Switch off the power supply unit for about 30 seconds. Switch back on again
so that that Tachograph records a power-fail detection full-scale sweep. Note:
this is a legal requirement only for vehicles registered after 1st January 1996

ƒ Disconnect the head tester from the Tachograph and check that the ‘pulser
disconnect’ signal is recorded by the Tachograph i.e. a 0 to 30 km/h sweep
every few seconds. Note: this is a legal requirement only for vehicles
registered after 1st January 1996

ƒ Leave the ‘pulser disconnect’ condition running for a few minutes then
reconnect the head tester to the Tachograph and ensure that the ‘pulser
disconnect’ condition clears

ƒ Switch off the power supply unit and the head tester and disconnect
from the Tachograph
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 243

The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Bench Test Procedure

ƒ Open the Tachograph and remove the driver and co-driver charts. Record the
final odometer reading and note the difference from the reading at the start of
the test
ƒ Examine the driver and co-driver test charts and check that:
ƒ All the chart speed, duty and distance traces are clearly legible
ƒ The 40, 80 and 100 km/h speeds selected during the test were each recorded
for a period of 2 minutes on the driver chart and that the recorded speeds
were within ±3 km/h of the true speed
ƒ The non-driving modes, work, available and rest, were correctly recorded each
for a period of 2 minutes on both the driver and co-driver charts
ƒ The difference in the odometer reading from the start and the end of the test
is within the tolerance of ±1% the actual distance travelled and recorded on
the head tester
ƒ The distance trace is consistent with the difference in the odometer
readings
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 244
The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Power Connections

ƒ An AMP mini timer plug, 2714-265 and terminal 2714-270, are used with
automotive insulated cable 1 mm2, to make up the appropriate power
loom for an 8400 Tachograph as shown. For an 8300 Tachograph, the
only difference would be that the Tachograph electronics are powered
separately via the A4 connection

2714-265
(Housing Natural)
LAMPS
AND

2714-270 (tabs)
IGNITION

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 245

The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Sender Connections

ƒ The connections for the standard yellow Amp mini-timer 4-wire


Tachograph sender input connector are as listed in the table below. Pins
5 to 8 are not connected to the sender. A full description of all 8300/8400
Tachograph rear connections is included in Appendix A of the 8400 section
of the Training Manual

SOCKET B VR 8 PULSE SENDER (4-WIRE)


Pin 1 Positive supply to sender Black
Pin 2 Negative supply to sender Brown or Red
Pin 3 Main channel input Blue
Pin 4 Complimentary Input White
Pin 5 -
Pin 6 -
Pin 7 -
Pin 8 -

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 246
The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs –
Dangerous Goods Vehicles Fitment

ƒ Extra care must be taken when installing or repairing Tachographs on this


type of vehicle due to the dangers involved – a Technician must only work
on a dangerous goods vehicle Tachograph system if they are ADR certified

ƒ The 8300 Tachograph was designed to be intrinsically safe and carries


BASEEFA approval for use in hazardous goods vehicles when used in
conjunction with an 8300 barrier device – check that the [EExib] label is
attached before fitting an 8300 Tachograph

ƒ The 8400 Tachograph carries LCIE approval for use in hazardous goods
vehicles when used in conjunction with an 8400 barrier device – again
check the [EEXib] label is attached before fitting an 8400 Tachograph

ƒ The 8300 and 8400 when used specifically with their own barrier device
have approval to the [EEx ib] IIB standard. This standard allows for
Tachograph fitment in vehicles carrying all flammable materials except
hydrogen, acetylene, carbon disulphide and ethyl nitrate

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 247

The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Dangerous Goods


Vehicles Fitment

ƒ 8300 and 8400 Tachographs MUST ONLY be fitted in a Dangerous Goods


Vehicle if they are fitted in conjunction with a 8300 or 8400 barrier device
respectively

ƒ An 8300 Tachograph must NEVER be used with an 8400 barrier device or


any competitor barrier devices

ƒ An 8400 Tachograph must NEVER be used with an 8300 barrier device or


any competitor barrier devices

ƒ When repairing a Tachograph/barrier system in a Dangerous Goods


Vehicle, a faulty part may only be replaced by an identical replacement
part. If an identical replacement part cannot be found, the whole
Tachograph/barrier system should be removed and replaced by an
equivalent approved Tachograph/barrier system

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 248
The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Calibration Switches

ƒ The vehicle should be calibrated using an approved method as previously


described. When the vehicle calibration parameter, W-factor, has been
determined this value should be matched to the calibration factor for the
Tachograph, K-factor

ƒ The K-factor for a 8300/8400 Tachograph is set using the bank of 10


calibration DIL switches that are accessed by opening the Tachograph. In a
sealed system the calibration switches are covered by a sealed calibration
switch cover, which can be removed by breaking the seal to expose the
switches as shown below

ƒ The switch settings for a required K-factor value may be determined using the
MKII programmer DIL calculate function. Alternatively they may be found by
using the calibration look-up tables as shown in Appendix C of the Training
Manual 8400 Tachograph section. The required W-factor value should be
looked up in the table and the corresponding DIL switch settings should be
read from the next column of the table

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 249

The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Calibration Switches

ƒ For example, if the vehicle W-factor was found to be 4885 pulses/km, the
nearest W-factor range available in the table is 4880 to 4890 pulses/km. For
the Tachograph to operate accurately in this vehicle the following of the 10
calibration switches should be set ‘ON’,

1-34-6-89-

ƒ Note: The 10 calibration switches can be set ON or OFF as required – make


sure each of the switches is fully pressed down into the required position.
Use a small screwdriver or other thinly pointed instrument to set the DIL
switches as required

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 250
The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Calibration Switches

8300 Bank1 DIL Switches 8400 Bank1 DIL Switches

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 251

The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Checking the System


Installation

ƒ It is a VOSA requirement to prove that a Tachograph installation is correct by


carrying out a Tachograph test after installation into a vehicle

ƒ The procedure for testing a 8300/8400 Tachograph that is installed in a


vehicle is as follows:
• Switch off the vehicle ignition and check that the clock indicator is
turning
• Switch on ignition, switch on the vehicle sidelights and check that the
Tachograph dial lights are illuminated
• Drive the vehicle onto a rolling-road and accelerate the vehicle on the
rolling road rollers until the speed reading on the rolling road console
is 50 km/h. Hold the speed at 50 km/h and check that the
Tachograph displays a speed of 50 km/h ±4 km/h. Decelerate the
vehicle to a stop and check that the Tachograph speed returns to
zero. If a rolling-road is not available the vehicle must be road tested
to ensure the Tachograph responds to vehicle speed changes

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 252
The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Features and Output Signals

ƒ Electrical Terminations - Electrical connections are made by means of 4


sockets to suit AMP mini timer plugs. The mini timer plugs are colour coded;
white - power, yellow - sender, red - engine speed, brown - auxiliary signals.
The connections are of similar format to the equivalent competitors’ units

ƒ Tachograph Charts - Both 8300 and 8400 Tachographs use a conventional


wax coated pressure sensitive paper chart with a pear-shaped centre
mounting hole. The format of the chart is the same as used in competitors’
Tachographs, i.e. speed trace on the outside part, then duty trace, distance
trace and finally centrefield at the middle of the chart. Before inserting a
chart, the rear of the chart should be checked for the correct type approval
number being shown i.e. e11-18 for 125 or e11-19 for 140 km/h 8300
versions or e11-20 for 125, e11-21 for 140 or e11-24 for 180 km/h 8400
versions respectively

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 253

The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Features and Output Signals

ƒ Voltage Requirements – 8300 and 8400 series Tachographs are available in


either 12V or 24V versions depending on the type of vehicle in which the unit
is to be fitted

ƒ Intrinsically Safe – The 8300 is BASEEFA approved and the 8400 is LCIE
approved for installation in hazardous goods vehicles when used respectively
in conjunction with an 8300 or 8400 Safety Network (Barrier Device)

ƒ Automatic Operation - All 8300 and 8400 Tachographs are automatic in


operation. This means that the Tachograph will record driving time
automatically whenever a vehicle moves, irrespective of the position of the
duty mode switch. As the Tachograph will only record driving when the
vehicle is in motion, the driver can, for example, select rest (2) just before
stopping but rest will not be recorded until the vehicle stops. Similarly, even
if the driver forgets to operate the duty switch after his break and before
driving off, the Tachograph will automatically record driving. As long as the
duty switch is moved to work (4) or available (1) as required before the next
stop is made, the chart will provide a true record of the day’s work

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 254
The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Features and Output Signals

ƒ Switched Overspeed Output, A8 – This output switches to 8 volts when the


speed is greater than overspeed setting. This can be used to operate an
indicator or buzzer to warn the driver of any overspeed infringements

ƒ Proportional Speed Output, B7/D3 – This is a positive going pulse output


signal that is triggered by each pulse from gearbox sender. Commonly, the
signal is used for operating a road speed limiter, but it can also be used for
any piece of equipment requiring a secure and reliable speed related signal,
e.g. automatic gearbox control or inhibition, raising and lowering of Coach
air suspension systems and computers to help improve driver fuel economy

ƒ Distance Output, B8 - The Tachograph generates a ‘4-pulses per metre’


distance output signal. This is a string of positive pulses generated at a rate
where 4 pulses correspond to 1 metre of distance travelled. This output is
suitable for use with automatic chassis lubrication systems for example. The
signal is unaffected by the vehicle calibration factor and the same frequency
is produced for a given speed. Note: this output is not synchronous

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 255

The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Features and Output Signals

ƒ Modified Revs Output, C7 - Pin C7 provides a pulse train output, which is the
same frequency as the signal being fed into the Tachograph C3 input from
the pulser on the engine or the alternator W terminal. This signal can be
used to drive an external rev counter or revs indicator

ƒ Revs/Minute Warning Output, C8 - This output is pulsed at 250Hz when the


revs are recorded in the upper economy band and switches continuously to
8V when another revs band is being recorded

ƒ Serial Data Output, D7 - The 8300 and 8400 Tachographs have a serial data
output channel which allows access to information relative to W factor,
speed, distance, driver duty and other functions within the Tachograph

ƒ Switched Low Speed Output, D8 - This is a switched output operating at


3km/h. It is designed to make safe the operation of automatic doors on
coaches. The signal is suitable for any other applications where a vehicle
function must be stopped or started when the vehicle starts to move

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 256
The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Features and Output Signals

ƒ Power Failure and Sender Disconnection Detection - The 8300 & 8400
Tachographs will force their speed pointer to fully deflect on reconnection
after a power interrupt and it will oscillate from 0-30km/h if the sender is
interrupted as is required by EU regulations. On the 8300 tachograph, this
is from Serial No. 730007 or greater only

ƒ Ignition on Joggle Recording - This is an optional feature that may be


programmed ON or OFF. If the feature is ON, then when the vehicle is at
zero speed and the ignition is switched on, the speed pointer ‘joggles’ and
this results in an approximately 1mm wide speed trace being recorded on
the chart at the 0km/h part of the speed trace band

ƒ 4th Stylus Tachograph - This is a special version of the Tachograph. As well


as having the three normal styli for recording speed, driver duty and
distance, there is a fourth stylus that can be used for engine speed
recording or for event recording and in some rare cases an out-of-scope
driving, off-road, version was produced. The extra stylus is situated
between the driver duty and speed styli
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 257

The 8300 & 8400 Tachographs – Features and Output Signals

ƒ Engine Speed Recording - This feature is only available with the 4th stylus
versions of Tachograph. Engine speed information can be of particular
interest to vehicle operators and the method of recording is designed for easy
interpretation. The trace is recorded on the chart, between the driver duty
trace and the speed trace, and is made up of different thickness bands that
relate to ‘low power’, ‘economy’, ‘poor economy’ and ‘engine over-revving’
engine speeds. The actual revs/minute values that define the range of each
engine speed band can be set by DIL switches for an 8300 or easily
programmed with a MKII Tachograph programmer for an 8400
ƒ Event Recording - This feature is also only available with 4th stylus versions of
the Tachograph. The Tachograph can detect signals at the event input pins
D1 and D2 and subsequently record the absence or presence of one, two or no
events. Thus the events may occur singly or together. This can be very useful
to the fleet operator, and can be used to record a variety of occurrences such
as power take off or tail gate operation etc. The trace is recorded on the
chart, between the driver duty trace and the speed trace, and is made up of
different thickness bands that relate to ‘no events’, thin line, ‘event 1’,
25% trace height, ‘event 2’, 75% trace height or ‘both events’, full
trace height
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 258
Section 2.4

The Stoneridge MKII Tachograph


Programmer

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 259

The MKII Programmer – Introduction and Overview

Socket C
Socket A
Socket B

LCD Display
2 x 16

Keypad

Socket D Socket E

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 260
The MKII Programmer – Introduction and Overview

ƒ Connectors - The MKII Programmer has three connectors on the end of the
unit above the display and two others on the side and on the bottom, as
shown above,

• Connector A - This is a 6-pin DIN socket for connection of the battery


charging unit, the bench test leads, the pulser leads for rolling road or
fixed distance calibration and the Stoneridge VR8400 programming lead
• Connector B - This is a 4-pin DIN socket for connection of a flexi-switch
and the Stoneridge VR8300, 8400, 2400 & SE5000 serial data lead
• Connector C - This is an 8-pin DIN socket for connecting to a Stoneridge
VR2400 or SE5000, Continental-VDO Kienzle1319, 1324 or 1381DTCO,
MotoMeter EGK-100 or Actia Smartach Tachographs
• Connector D - This is an RJ11 Socket that is used for upgrading the
Programmer Software version
• Connector E - This is a Smartcard Connector, used for programmer
calibrations only
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 261

The MKII Programmer – Introduction and Overview

ƒ Menu options are navigated using the ‘left/right’


arrow keys

ƒ ‘Enter’ key is used to select options or to terminate


a parameter entry

ƒ ‘Menu’ key is used to return to the main menu and


abort the current menu item

ƒ ‘Send’ key is used to transmit parameters to any


connected Tachograph

ƒ ‘Delete’ key allows the deletion of an entered value

ƒ ‘0..9’ keys are alpha-numeric for the entry of data


strings

ƒ ‘ON/OFF’ key is used for turning unit on and off


© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 262
The MKII Programmer – Introduction and Overview

ƒ What Does the MKII Programmer Do?


• Determines the characteristic coefficient (‘W-factor’) of a vehicle using a
rolling road or either of two different fixed-distance methods
• Carries out bench tests of Tachographs semi-automatically
• Checks the K-factor setting of Tachographs
• Calculates the DIL switch settings for any valid K-factor
• Can be used as a Tachograph speed simulator
• Determines the appropriate pulses per engine revolution (PPR) setting
for a vehicle
• Allows Tachograph internal parameters to be Read, Checked and
Reprogrammed if required
Note: Stoneridge VR8400, VR2400 & SE5000
Motometer EGK100 and Actia Smartach
Continental-VDO Kienzle 1319, 1324 & 1381DTCO
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 263

The MKII Programmer – Introduction and Overview

• Allows the initiation of self-test modes

• Allows the resetting of the memory to default values

• Can carry-out a Tachograph Clock Test

• Can analyse the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) stored internally in


the Stoneridge VR2400 & SE5000, Continental-VDO Kienzle1324 &
1381DTCO and Actia Smartach Tachographs. A full list of DTCs for
VR2400 and SE5000 is included respectively in the 2400 and SE5000
Sections of the Training Manual

• Includes internal diagnostics routines to confirm that the


Programmer is functioning correctly

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 264
The MKII Programmer – Introduction and Overview

ƒ With Which Tachograph Types can the MKII Programmer be Used?

• A MKII Tachograph Programmer can be used with all types of


electronic Tachographs, i.e.

• Stoneridge VR1400, 8300, 8400, 2400 & SE5000

• Continental-VDO Kienzle1314, 1318, 1319, 1324 & 1381DTCO

• MotoMeter EGK-100

• Actia Smartach

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 265

The MKII Programmer – Software Version and Upgrading

ƒ How do you Check the Programmer Software Version?

• The MKII Programmer software version is displayed each time the


unit is switched on. It can also be displayed via the Diagnostics
Menu/ROM test as described below. The software version must be
2.0 or greater for use with Digital Tachographs

ƒ How do you Upgrade a Programmer’s Software Version?

• A MKII Programmer’s software version can be upgraded using a


Standard PC running a dedicated Stoneridge installation program
which is available on a Programmer specific Upgrade CD. The PC -
Serial Communications Port is connected to the Programmer, Socket
D above via a Field Download Cable, Part Number: 7780-953

ƒ All MKII Programmers are upgradeable using this method

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 266
The MKII Programmer – Power Supply and Charging

ƒ The MKII Programmer is powered from a rechargeable nickel-metal-hydride


battery pack. The voltage of the Battery Pack may be checked by selecting
‘Diagnostics Menu/Battery Detect’ as described below. The 9.6V Battery Pack
has a capacity of 600mA/hr. The idle current of the programmer is 30mA,
rising to a maximum of 78mA when in normal use. Using the communications
features results in a current of around 45mA. The OFF state current is around
35µA, which maintains the function of the Programmers internal temperature
compensated real-time clock. A fully charged new battery pack will give a
continuous power on time of 13 hours. Assuming a badly degraded battery,
the programmer should have an expected worst case power-ON time of around
7 hours before recharge is required
ƒ The battery is recharged using the AC charger supplied with the Programmer.
When fully discharged, the battery will take about 14 hours to recharge. To
conserve battery charge, the unit will switch off automatically after 10 minutes
of non-use, except when in a bench test mode, or if the Voltage drops below
8V, below which tests become inaccurate. The Programmer should NOT be
continuously connected to the charger - this can greatly reduce the
batteries performance, and in extreme cases can destroy the battery
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 267

The MKII Programmer – Diagnostics Menu

ƒ There are a number of additional functions provided in the Programmer


Diagnostics Menu which carry out various self-test functions and which allow
setting of various default values. To gain access to the internal utilities, first
ensure that the Tachograph Programmer is turned off. Press and hold the
ENTER key and then turn on the unit by pressing the ON key. As the unit turns
on it will emit a beep as usual, but in this case will request a code; type ‘8642’
and press ‘ENTER’, the Programmer will then enter the DIAGNOSTICS MENU
ƒ The functions included in the Diagnostics Menu are as follows,
• Language Select - The MKII Programmer may be operated in a number
of different languages. The available languages are dependant on the
Programmer type
• Set Time and Date - This is used to set the time, 24 hour clock, and
date (ddMMyyyy format) used by the Programmer
• Fixed Distance Length - This allows the Length of the Fixed Distance
Track to be altered between 20 and 1000m. This must be set
to 20m for use in the UK
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 268
The MKII Programmer – Diagnostics Menu

• Backlight Select - This is not available for the Standard MKII


Programmer
• Hardware Test - This function is used in conjunction with an external
test jig for conformance testing. It is for use by SE personnel only
• Keyboard Test - This enables the user to check that the keyboard is
fully functional by pressing each key in turn
• Display Test - This causes the unit to display a visual routine so that
the user can check that the display is functioning correctly

• ROM Test - This function can be used to check the Programmer’s


internal read-only memory (ROM) and display the result
• Battery Detect - This is used to check the Voltage of the Programmer’s
internal battery pack. If within tolerance, the message “Battery OK!”
will be displayed. If not, then the battery requires charging

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 269

The MKII Programmer – Diagnostics Menu

• Frequency Test - This is used during conformance testing to calibrate


the accuracy of the clock within the Tachograph Programmer. This
function is for use by SE personnel only

• Set calib no. - This enables a user to enter a default identification


string for a particular Approved Tachograph Centre. Generally this is
the identification issued by the Tachograph Centre approvals
authority

• Bench test type - This allows the selection of the appropriate bench
test for any given country. Standard bench tests are pre-
programmed for several countries; selecting the Custom bench test
option allows a user to define a different test sequence. For the UK,
the Bench test type option must be set to ‘UK’ as this is the only
Bench test type approved by VOSA

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 270
The MKII Programmer – Tachograph Type Selection

ƒ Before using the Programmer, the model of


Tachograph to be interfaced with must be selected
VR8400 MAIN MENU
from the Main Menu. When the Programmer is
:TACHO SELECT
switched on the first item displayed on the ‘MAIN
MENU’ is ‘TACHO SELECT’. From elsewhere in the
‘MAIN MENU’ press the ← or → keys until ‘TACHO
SELECT’ is displayed

ƒ Press ENTER and the ‘TACHO TYPE’ menu will be


displayed. Press ENTER again and then use the ←
or → keys to select the appropriate Tachograph TACHO TYPE
type i.e. Stoneridge VR2400, 8400, 8300, 1400 or :8400 Series
SE5000 series, Continental-VDO Kienzle1324, 1319,
1318, 1314 or 1381DTCO, Motometer EGK-100 or
Actia Smartach. Press ENTER to make the selection
and then MENU to return to the MAIN MENU

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 271

The MKII Programmer – Pulser Type Selection 8300 & 1400

ƒ For Stoneridge VR8300 or VR1400 series


Tachographs, the pulser (or gearbox sender) type VR8300 MAIN MENU
to be used must also be selected. This is to ensure :PULSER SELECT
that any calibration factor determined is correct

ƒ Press With the Programmer at the MAIN MENU and


displaying PULSER SELECT, press ENTER and
PULSER TYPE will be displayed. Use the ← or → PULSER TYPE
keys to select the appropriate pulser type. Press :8 Pulses/Rev ← →
ENTER to make the selection and then MENU to
return to the MAIN MENU

ƒ Note: The 2 pulse/rev option should only be selected if the Tachograph is


fitted with a Stoneridge Veeder-Root 2-pulse sender. The 8 pulse/rev option
must be selected for all other pulser types regardless of the actual number
of pulses per rev from the sender

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 272
The MKII Programmer – Sender Selection 2400

ƒ For Stoneridge VR2400 series Tachographs, the


VR2400 MAIN MENU
sender type must be selected
:PULSER SELECT

ƒ With the Programmer at the VR2400 MAIN MENU


and displaying ‘PULSER SELECT’, connect a Cable U SENDER TYPE
between the Programmers’ Socket ‘C’ and the 2400 :Encrypted ← →
Tachograph 6-way D-shaped socket and then press
ENTER
ƒ Note: Use the ← or → keys to scroll through the options until the
preferred sender type is displayed. Press ENTER and again to confirm the
selection. The four choices available for sender Type are,
• Encrypted, 4-Wire, 3-Wire and Magnetic.

ƒ For all other Tachograph types no sender type is selectable


© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 273

The MKII Programmer – Programmer Functions

ƒ Listed below are the Functions available in the MKII programmer along with a
brief description of the function and to which Tachograph types the function is
applicable. Note: all Tachograph types if not specified
ƒ Tacho Select - this function allows the operator to specify the Tachograph
type that is to be calibrated or tested by the Programmer, as described above
ƒ Pulser Select (Stoneridge VR8300, 1400 & 2400 and Continental-VDO
Kienzle1314) – this function allows the operator to specify the pulser type (or
sender type for VR2400) that is being used with the current Tachograph, as
described above
ƒ Rolling Road Test - this function is used to determine the “W” factor of the
vehicle using a Hartridge (or similar) Rolling Road
ƒ Fixed Distance #1 Test - this function is used to determine the “W” factor of
the vehicle using the Physical method 20m track
ƒ Fixed Distance #2 Test - this function is used to determine the “W” factor of
the vehicle using the Physical method 20m track with a Flexi-Switch

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 274
The MKII Programmer – Programmer Functions

ƒ Bench Test - this semi-automatic function assists a Workshop Technician


when bench testing a Tachograph using a series of commands displayed on
the screen
ƒ Speed Simulator Test - this function injects speed pulses into a
Tachograph for the purpose of checking a Tachograph speed pointer, the
overspeed warning, the stylus positions on chart or the speed limiter
operation
ƒ RPM Pulse Test - Stoneridge VR2400, 8400 & 8300, Continental-VDO
Kienzle1318, Motometer EGK100, 4-stylus Tachographs only. This function is
used to determine the “Pulse Per Engine Rev” from the “W” terminal on the
alternator or a revs sender
ƒ Clock Test - this function checks the accuracy of a Tachograph clock. The
function is automatic for Motometer EGK100, Stoneridge VR2400 & SE5000,
Continental-VDO Kienzle 1324 & 1381DTCO and for Actia Smartach, but
uses an optional external clock-tester for all other Tachographs
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 275

The MKII Programmer – Programmer Functions

ƒ Tacho Control - Stoneridge VR8400 & 2400 and Continental-VDO


Kienzle1324. This function is used to force the Tachograph to enter either a
“Self Test” or an “Extended Test” mode, to Reset the Tachograph memory to
the “Default state” or to pair a Tachograph with a sender for the 2400 and
1324 only

ƒ Identify Tacho - Stoneridge VR2400 & SE5000, Continental-VDO


Kienzle1324 & 1381DTCO and Actia Smartach. This function interrogates a
Tachograph via its K-line connection and determines the System supplier,
Manufacture date, Serial number, Hardware version, Software number,
Software version and System name

ƒ Read/Erase DTCs - Stoneridge VR2400 & SE5000, Continental-VDO


Kienzle1324 & 1381DTCO and Actia Smartach. This function enables the
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) stored in the Tachograph to be displayed on
the Programmer and then erased in the Tachograph if required

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 276
The MKII Programmer – Programmer Functions

ƒ Read all data / Modify data / Send all data - Stoneridge VR2400 &
SE5000, Continental-VDO Kienzle1319, 1324 & 1381DTCO, EGK100 and Actia
Smartach. These functions interrogate the Tachograph via the K-line or serial
data line. They allow a Workshop Technician to change various Tachograph
settings in the programmer and then re-program the Tachograph with all the
data set-up in the Programmer in a single operation

ƒ Program Tacho - Stoneridge VR8400. This function can be used to select


and modify various settings such as “Ignition Recording On” and “Overspeed
Setting”

ƒ K-factor Test - Stoneridge VR8400 and Continental-VDO Kienzle1319, 1318


& 1314. This function determines the K-factor currently set on a Tachograph

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 277

The MKII Programmer – Programmer Functions

ƒ DIL calculate - Stoneridge VR8400, 8300 & 1400, Continental-VDO


Kienzle1318. This function eliminates the need to look up DIL switch
calibration tables

ƒ Time/Date - Stoneridge SE5000, Continental-VDO 1381DTCO and Actia


Smartach. This function allows the UTC time/date, and time offset in a
Tachograph to be read and modified

ƒ Pair/Test - Stoneridge SE5000 and Continental-VDO 1381DTCO. This


function can be used to force the Tachograph to pair with a KITAS2 sender
for SE5000 & 1381, and allow a number of functionality tests to be carried
out on an SE5000

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 278
Section 2.5

Using The MKII Programmer With


the 8400 Tachograph

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 279

Using the MKII with 8400 – Rolling Road Test

ƒ This uses the MKII Programmer in conjunction with a


rolling road. The vehicle to be calibrated is positioned
with its driving wheels on the rollers of the rolling road
and is then driven at a constant speed of 50km/h.
The Tachograph Programmer will then determine the
W-factor. The programmer is connected to the 8400
using a Jack-socket cable and a crocodile clip to a
vehicle earth connection. The method of the test is as
shown,
From the MAIN MENU select ROLLING ROAD VR8400 MAIN MENU
using the ← and → keys. Press ENTER. :ROLLING ROAD

Increase the speed of the vehicle as Hold at 50km/h


indicated by the rolling road ENTER to Start
equipment until it is steady at 50km/h.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 280
Using the MKII with 8400 – Rolling Road Test

Press ENTER and the Programmer will start Hold at 50 km/h


counting pulses. The pulses will be audible Reading pulses
as low-pitched clicks.

After about 15 seconds it will emit an W=8000 K=8000


audible beep and the measured W-factor DIL=_23_____9_
will be displayed. The measured K-factor
and the required DIL switch settings will be
displayed.

Note: In the case of the message ‘ERROR! ERROR! CHECK


CHECK CONNECTIONS’ being displayed, CONNECTIONS
ensure that the ground connection is made
correctly. Otherwise check the other
connections.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 281

Using the MKII with 8400 – Fixed Distance 2 Test

ƒ This method uses the 20m measured distance track available


at UK approved Tachograph Centres. Care must be taken to
ensure that the set Fixed Distance Length (as adjusted via
the Diagnostics Menu) and the actual track length are the
same otherwise the W-Factor determined will be incorrect
ƒ The vehicle is driven along the measured track but all
measurements are automatically carried out by the
Programmer, which then automatically determines the W-
factor
ƒ To simplify the measurements at each end of the measured distance a flexi-
switch is used which makes contact with an identical marker block at each end
of the track. There is then no requirement for any operator intervention - the
only requirement is to drive the vehicle the length of the track at a reasonably
constant speed, roughly walking pace, such that the flexi-switch hits the
markers at either end of the track. The programmer is again connected to the
8400 using a Jack-socket cable and a crocodile clip to a vehicle earth
connection. The method of the test is as shown
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 282
Using the MKII with 8400 – Fixed Distance 2 Test

A B
20 metre track

Flexi-Switch End-of-track Markers

Select FIXED DISTANCE #2 on the MAIN VR8400 MAIN MENU


MENU using the ← and → keys and press :FIXED DIST #2
ENTER.

Move the vehicle to a position a short distance Drive to point A


before the beginning of the 20m track Press <ENTER>
(position A) such that the flexi-switch lever is
in line with the marker at the beginning of the
track and then press ENTER.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 283

Using the MKII with 8400 – Fixed Distance 2 Test

Drive the vehicle at a reasonably constant Drive to point B


speed past markers at points A and B. A low Reading pulses .
pitched click will be heard as each pulse is
Drive to point B
received and, at the same frequency as the
Reading pulses
clicks, a visual indicator will be displayed as

shown. When a marker is passed a louder Drive to point B


audible beep will be heard. Reading pulses

After the second marker has been passed the End of run #1
Programmer will display the measured W- W-factor = 8000
factor for that run. Stop the vehicle and press
ENTER.

Repeat steps 2 and 3, this time moving back Drive to point B


from position B to position A. Press ENTER

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 284
Using the MKII with 8400 – Fixed Distance 2 Test

Repeat steps 2 and 3 once more in each End of run #4


direction giving a total of two runs in each W-factor = 8000
direction. After passing the last marker the W-
factor for the last run will be displayed.

Press ENTER again and the average of the W=8000 K=8000


measured W-factors for the four runs will be DIL=_23_____9_
displayed as well as the K-Factor. The 8400
DIL switch settings will also be displayed.

ƒ For best accuracy two runs should be carried out in each direction rather than
four in one direction since this will compensate for any slight gradient of the
track. The repeatability of this method is such that the effect of a slight
gradient of the fixed track is easily measurable. By taking the average of
runs in opposite directions the effect of the gradient is removed

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 285

Using the MKII with 8400 – Bench Test

ƒ Before installation and during recalibration it is a Legal requirement to carry


out a Tachograph Bench Test with the Tachograph removed from the vehicle.
This requires the unit to be run at different speeds for different periods of
time and with different driver duty modes selected

ƒ The Tachograph Programmer provides a test signal simulating the pulser


output which gives the required speed outputs for the required times. The
only operator intervention is then to set the duty switches at the appropriate
times as indicated by the Programmer. The Programmer is connected to the
8400 using a Tachograph drive lead, 7780-981, similar to that shown below

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 286
Using the MKII with 8400 – Bench Test

ƒ Before performing the Bench Test it must be ensured that the UK Bench Test
is selected via Diagnostics menu. It is recommended prior to Bench Testing a
Clock Test should be performed on the Tachograph
From the MAIN MENU select BENCH TEST VR8400 MAINMENU
using the ← and → keys, and press ENTER. :BENCH TEST
Select the Tachograph scale (125, 140 or Select the scale
180 km/h) using the ← and → keys, and : 125 km/h ← →
press ENTER.
Set the Tachograph to a K-factor of 8000 Select K-factor
(remember to note the original setting first). :8000 Pul/km?
Press ENTER.
Check DIL switches 2,3 & 9 are ON with Check tacho
others OFF. settings

Check the Tachograph drive cable Connect drive


connection is made. lead to tacho

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 287

Using the MKII with 8400 – Bench Test

Set power supply voltage to the correct level for Switch on at


the Tachograph (12V or 24V). correct voltage

Make sure clock tell-tale is moving. Check clock is


Stepping OK
Check both bulbs are lit. Check bulbs are
illuminated
The clock time should be adjusted if necessary. Check clock for
accuracy
Perform the task displayed. Press ENTER on Prepare and
completion. insert 2 charts
Note: For dual driver Tachographs, 2
charts have to be inserted. For a single
driver, only 1 chart has to be inserted.

Perform the task displayed. Press ENTER on Close the


completion. tachograph

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 288
Using the MKII with 8400 – Bench Test

Set the driver and crew duty to active (4). Driver=Active


Press ENTER on completion. Crew=Active
The speed will now be maximum speed for the Speed: 125 km/h
selected scale for 10 seconds and the time will Time: 10 s
count down to zero and then an audible beep
will be heard.
The speed displayed will then go to 0km/h for Speed: 0 km/h
10 seconds (the time will count down to zero) Time: 10 s
and an audible beep will be heard again.
Make sure the FSD speed marking on the chart Check clock
is within 5 minutes of the Tachograph time. to chart time
Perform the task displayed. Press ENTER on Close the
completion. tachograph
Note the current odometer reading on the Note odometer
Tachograph. This will be required later to check reading
the accuracy of the odometer. Press ENTER.
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 289

Using the MKII with 8400 – Bench Test

The speed will now go to 40km/h and will be Speed: 40 km/h


held for 2½ minutes (the time will count down Time: 150s
to zero). At the end of the 2½ minute test
there will be an audible beep.
The speed will then go up to 80 km/h. After a Speed: 80 km/h
further 2½ minutes (the time will count down to Time: 150s
zero) there will again be an audible beep
indicating the end of that test.
The speed will move up to 100 km/h for a Speed: 100 km/h
further 3 minutes (the time will count down to Time: 180s
zero). At the end of the time there will be a
further beep and the speed will return to zero.
Set the driver and crew duty to active (4). Driver=Active
Press ENTER on completion. Crew=Active
The unit will record Active (4) duty for 2 Recording duty
minutes (the time will count down to zero). Time: 120 s
After that time an audible beep will be heard.
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 290
Using the MKII with 8400 – Bench Test

Set the driver and crew duty to passive (1). Driver=Passive


Press ENTER on completion. Crew=Passive

The unit will record Passive (1) duty for 2 Recording duty
minutes (the time will count down to zero). Time: 120 s
After that time an audible beep will be heard.

Set the driver and crew duty to rest (2). Press Driver=Rest
ENTER on completion. Crew=Rest

The unit will record Rest (2) duty for 2 minutes Recording duty
(the time will count down to zero). After that Time: 120 s
time an audible beep will be heard.

Compare the new odometer reading with that Check odometer


noted above - a difference of 10km is expected. added 10 km

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 291

Using the MKII with 8400 – Bench Test

ƒ Note: carry out ‘sender disconnect’ and ‘power interrupt’ tests to


complete the bench test

Remove the two charts and check the traces Check chart
recorded (speed, duty and distance on driver recordings
chart and duty only on crew chart). Press
ENTER.

The DIL switches must be returned to the Set K-exact


correct settings for the vehicle in which the for vehicle
Tachograph is to be fitted.

Switch off the power to the Tachograph and SWITCH OFF


disconnect the power cable. POWER SUPPLY

Press the ENTER key to complete the test and VR8400 MAIN MENU
return to the MAIN MENU. :BENCH TEST

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 292
Using the MKII with 8400 – Speed Simulator Test

ƒ The speed simulator function is used to inject speed pulses into a Tachograph.
This can be used to check the accuracy of the Tachograph speed pointer or
speed stylus position. The final distance displayed also enables the
Tachograph odometer to be checked. When the Tachograph is still fitted in
the vehicle, the speed simulator function is also useful for verifying the
operation of speed or distance related ancillaries such as a Road Speed Limiter

ƒ The programmer is again connected to the 8400 using a Jack-socket cable and
a crocodile clip to a vehicle earth connection, although a flexible jack
extension cable is also required to enable the Tachograph to be closed during
the test. The method of the test is as shown below,

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 293

Using the MKII with 8400 – Speed Simulator Test

Select SPEED SIMULATOR from the MAIN VR8400 MAIN MENU


MENU and press ENTER. :SPEED SIMULATOR

Press the DELETE key, and enter the value of Select K-factor
K-factor that the Tachograph is currently set to :8000 Pul/km?
into the Programmer. Then press ENTER.

Key in the speed required and press ENTER. Enter speed


Note that there is a minimum detectable speed : km/h
for each Tachograph type, which depends on
the K-factor but may be up to 20km/h. Below
this, the speed will reset to 0km/h.

The Programmer will now inject speed pulses K=8000 Pul/km


into the Tachograph. Speed=50 km/h

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 294
Using the MKII with 8400 – Speed Simulator Test

Use the ↑ and ↓ (1 and 4) keys to increase or K = 8000 Pul/km


decrease speed. Speed=51 km/h

When the test is completed press ENTER. The Distance=1090 m


unit will now display the total distance covered Press <ENTER>
(in metres).

Press ENTER to key in a new speed or MENU to VR8400 MAIN MENU


return to the MAIN MENU. :SPEED SIMULATOR

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 295

Using the MKII with 8400 – Clock Test

ƒ A Tachograph clock test can be carried out on radio-sized Tachographs using a


direct programmer-Tachograph connection. However for circular Tachographs
such as the 8400 an independent clock tester as shown, must be connected to
the programmer socket C and there is no direct connection to the Tachograph

ƒ Initially set both the Tachograph duty knobs to Rest. Ensure that the
Tachograph is powered with speed pointer at rest. When the test starts, hold
the adapter against the Tachograph face. For the correct location, a regular
clicking sound will be heard. Please note that the correct location is not
necessarily near the clock face, as the Tester detects the clock motor. If the
duty knobs are not at Rest or the speed pointer not at zero, the Tester may
detect the chart motor instead of the clock motor. Also, the Tester must not be
within 12 inches of a mains transformer. The method of the test is as shown
below

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 296
Using the MKII with 8400 – Clock Test

From the MAIN MENU select CLOCK TEST VR8400 MAIN MENU
using the ← and → keys. Hold the clock- :CLOCK TEST
tester at the correct location on the
Tachograph face (as described above).
Press ENTER to start the test.

The Programmer will display the message Testing clock


Testing clock, and will make a regular
clicking sound.

After a short time the clock accuracy in Clock Accuracy


seconds per day will be displayed. +0.2s/day

In the case of loss of signal or inconsistent ERROR! No signal


signal from the Tachograph (usually
caused by movement of the clock-tester
away from the clock motor), the
Programmer will display an error message.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 297

Using the MKII with 8400 – K-factor Test

ƒ This provides a simple way of determining the K-factor


currently set on the Tachograph

ƒ The programmer is connected to the 8400 using a Jack-


socket cable and a crocodile clip to a vehicle earth
connection. The method of the test is as shown

From the MAIN MENU select K-FACTOR TEST VR8400 MAIN MENU
using the ← and → keys. :K-FACTOR TEST
Press ENTER. The programmer will send test Sending Pulses
pulses to the Tachograph. Please wait
After a few moments the Programmer will Sending pulses
beep, and then display the K-factor setting of K=8000 < >
the Tachograph. If the K-factor is different
from the previous test, then the Programmer
will beep and display “<>“.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 298
Using the MKII with 8400 – K-factor Test

Step 3 will then repeat until the MENU or Sending pulses


ENTER button is pressed. Three repetitions are K = 8000
recommended. If a significantly different K-
factor (>10 pulses/km difference) is displayed,
this usually indicates a cable fault or bad
connection. It may also be due to a faulty
Tachograph.

Note: In the case of the message ERROR! ERROR! CHECK


CHECK CONNECTIONS being displayed, ensure CONNECTIONS
that the vehicle earth connection is made
correctly. Otherwise check the other
connections.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 299

Using the MKII with 8400 – DIL Calculate Test

ƒ The DIL Calculate function determines the appropriate combination of switches


for any K-factor, thus avoiding the need to use calibration look-up tables

ƒ No connections are required for this test and the method of the test is as shown

From the MAIN MENU select DIL VR8400 MAIN MENU


CALCULATE using arrow keys ← → and :DIL CALCULATE
press ENTER.
With the unit display as shown, press W=8000 K=8000
ENTER. DIL = _23_____9_
The W-factor of the vehicle may then be Enter W-factor
entered using the numeric keys; terminate :
the entry by pressing ENTER again.
The exact K-factor setting will be displayed, W=5000 K=5002
together with the required settings of the DIL = 12___6_89_
DIL switches.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 300
Using the MKII with 8400 – Programming the Tachograph

ƒ The MKII Programmer supports programming of the Stoneridge VR8400, 2400


& SE5000 series, the Continental-VDO Kienzle1319, 1324 & 1381DTCO series,
the MotoMeter EGK-100 and the Actia Smartach Tachographs

ƒ It should be noted that in all cases that, once settings have been altered, the
SEND ALL DATA command may be used to transfer all the information at the
end. It is however possible, to send each individual setting after alteration by
pressing the SEND key - although not with the 1319, EGK-100 and Smartach

ƒ Care must be taken when using SEND ALL DATA that no parameters are
accidentally overwritten with a wrong value which in extreme cases may cause
the vehicle to malfunction. Using the SEND key to individually transmit
parameters is more time consuming but is much safer in terms of accidentally
overwriting a Tachograph parameter with a wrong value

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 301

Using the MKII with 8400 – Programming the Tachograph

ƒ 8400 Parameters which may be Programmed are,

• Pulses Per engine Revolution (PPR) setting

• Low Power band, Economy band & Poor Economy engine speeds

• Ignition-on recording

• Overspeed

ƒ The programmer is again connected to the 8400 using a Jack-socket cable and
a crocodile clip to a vehicle earth connection. The method of the test is as
shown below

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 302
Using the MKII with 8400 – Programming the Tachograph

From the MAIN MENU select PROGRAM VR8400 MAIN MENU


TACHO and press ENTER. :PROGRAM TACHO

Pulses per Rev - Press ENTER and the Pulses per Rev
cursor will appear on the display. Use the :8
numeric keys to enter the required value. This
is usually 8 pulses per rev.

Engine Speed Recording - Select each of Low Power band


the engine speed recording bands (Low :700 Revs/min
Power, Economy and Poor Economy) in turn.
Economy band
Press ENTER and characters ← → will appear. :900 Revs/min
Use the ← and → keys to select the required
value and terminate by pressing ENTER. Poor Economy
:1100 Revs/min

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 303

Using the MKII with 8400 – Programming the Tachograph

Note: the Programmer will not allow entry of


inconsistent engine speed bands. For
example, the user may not set a minimum
speed for the Economy band which is lower
than the speed defined for the Low Power
band.

Ignition On Record - Press ENTER and ← Ign On Record


→ will appear on the display. Use the ← or :OFF
→ keys to select ON or OFF and press ENTER
to terminate the selection.

Overspeed - Press ENTER and a cursor will Overspeed


flash. Key in the required overspeed value :80 km/h
and terminate the entry by pressing ENTER.

Select SEND ALL DATA from the MAIN VR8400 MAIN MENU
MENU and press ENTER. :SEND ALL DATA

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 304
Using the MKII with 8400 – Practical Exercises

ƒ Use a MKII Programmer to verify the K factor is set to 9600. If the K factor is
not set to 9600, change the DIL switch settings accordingly, and verify

ƒ Use a MKII Programmer to Program an 8400 Tachograph with an overspeed


setting of 100 km/h

ƒ Use a MKII Programmer to Program an 8400 Tachograph for the ‘Ignition on


record’ function switched ON

ƒ Reset the K factor to 8000, and verify

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 305

Any Questions?

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 306
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 307

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 308
Combined Analogue & Digital
Tachograph Course
Day 3

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 309

Day 3

ƒ 08:30 Exam Results, Questions from Yesterday


ƒ 08:40 Introduction and Development of Radio Sized Tachographs
ƒ 09:00 The 2400 Tachograph
ƒ 10:15 Tea Break
ƒ 10:30 Using the MKII Programmer with the 2400 Tachograph
ƒ 12:30 Lunch
ƒ 13:00 Questions?
ƒ 13:10 Exam – Written & Multiple Choice
ƒ 13:40 Explanation of the Calibration Exercises which will take
place at the Rolling Road Facility including Health & Safety
Instructions for Visit
ƒ 14:00 Travel to the Rolling Road Facility
ƒ 14:15 Vehicle Calibration Practical Demonstrations & Practical Exams
ƒ 18:00 Finish

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 310
Section 3.1

Introduction to and Development


of Radio Sized Tachographs

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 311

Introduction to and Development of Radio-sized Tachographs

ƒ Until the late 1990’s all Tachographs installed into Heavy Goods vehicles and
larger buses were also used as the main speedometer/odometer display for
the vehicle

ƒ This had been the case for all Mechanical Tachographs, for early circular
electronic Tachographs, such as the 1400, and for more modern circular
Tachographs such as the 8400

ƒ Truck and Bus manufacturers wanted to introduce electronic instrument


clusters, which included a speedometer, an odometer, clock, revs indication
etc., all in the same sealed unit

ƒ This meant that there was no requirement for a traditional type Tachograph
for speedometer/odometer display

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 312
Introduction to and Development of Radio-sized Tachographs

ƒ Nevertheless, under Tachograph legislation a Tachograph was still required to


be fitted that met the requirements of the EU legislation 3821/85 as discussed
previously

ƒ As vehicles had already started to incorporate various different dashboard


modules that fitted into a standard ISO 7736 radio enclosure it was decided
to develop a Tachograph that met this size requirement. Hence Stoneridge
developed the 2400 radio-sized Tachograph to meet this requirement

ƒ As the Tachograph is still the legal instrument for determining the speed of
the vehicle and the distance travelled, these parameters must be passed to
the instrument cluster so that the cluster can display the correct legally
calculated speed and distance values. Information is passed from a 2400
Tachograph to the vehicle electronic instrument cluster via the vehicle
CANbus, K line or the D6 output

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 313

Introduction to and Development of Radio-sized Tachographs

2400
Tachograph

CANbus, Kline or D6

Instrument
Cluster

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 314
Section 3.2

The 2400 Tachograph

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 315

The 2400 Tachograph – Introduction

ƒ The Stoneridge 2400 automatic Tachograph was introduced in 1999 and


comprises an electronically controlled chart recorder within a drawer, which in
turn locates in an ISO 7736 standard radio enclosure. The Tachograph was
designed to comply with EU Regulations and thus displays (‘with-display’
version only) and records speed and distance in kilometres per hour and
kilometres respectively. In addition, the Tachograph can display and record
driver and co-driver activity as defined in the EC council regulation 3821/85.
The Tachograph incorporates an internal clock, which controls the mechanism
that rotates the charts and indicates the current time on the display. The
2400 Tachograph is available in EU approved 1-day versions for use in both
12 and 24 Volt vehicle systems

ƒ The drawer, which contains the charts, the display and the controls, is
electro-mechanically held in the locked closed position whilst a vehicle is
moving, and can only be opened, in order to facilitate access for inserting or
removing charts, with the vehicle stationary and ignition on

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 316
The 2400 Tachograph – Introduction

ƒ The 2400 Tachograph is designed for use by up to two drivers, and thus two
identical sets of driver-specific controls are provided adjacent to the display,
each of which comprise a Driver Duty push-button and three Light Emitting
Diodes (LEDs) that indicate the various activity modes. Three further control
push buttons are provided on the Tachograph below the display. The left-
hand control is a Mode Change push-button, the centre control is an Advance
push-button and the right-hand control is an Eject push-button

ƒ 2400 Tachographs use the same pear-hole charts that are used in modern
circular Tachographs, such as the 8400. Although, as with the 8400, different
charts are required for each different speed scale version. Normally there are
three trace types representing speed, duty and distance. However, if
requested by the customer, the Tachograph can be enabled to produce a
fourth trace to record events such as off-road driving or engine revolution
recording

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 317

The 2400 Tachograph – Introduction

ƒ All 2400 Tachographs are designed to perform the basic Tachograph


requirements of the EC regulation, 3821/85 but also meet the regulations
for power disconnect and gearbox sender failure as per amendments
3314/90, 3688/92 and 2479/95. The main differences in operation due
to these amendments are,

• The Tachograph will record a full scale deflection on the chart after a
power interrupt

• During a ‘sender disconnect’ condition the Tachograph speed


indicator will indicate, and a chart record will be made of a 0 to 30
km/h sweep every few seconds

ƒ The EU type approval numbers for the 2400 Tachograph are e11-27 for 125
km/h, e11-26 for 140 km/h and e11-25 for 180 km/h 2400 versions
respectively

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 318
The 2400 Tachograph – Introduction

ƒ A 2400 Tachograph must receive a speed signal from a electronic gearbox


sender. 2400s are programmable to accept signals from 3-wire, 4-wire 8-
pulses/rev senders, magnetic, and also from proximity senders in encrypted
Kitas1, and non-encrypted forms

ƒ The calibration of a 2400 Tachograph, the K-factor setting, is achieved by


means of an external programming device, such as the MKII programmer.
The K-factor range is much larger than for circular Tachographs, 500-64255
pulses/km

ƒ The duty LEDs are also used to indicate the presence of error conditions such
as a missing chart

ƒ A battery-backed Real-time-clock is used to ensure the correct time is


permanently available, even if the Tachograph is disconnected from the
vehicle battery. Note: not all versions

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 319

The 2400 Tachograph – Introduction

ƒ Available in ‘No display’ form specifically for use on vehicles fitted with an
instrument cluster that displays speed, distance, time etc

ƒ Error codes can be displayed and are stored in non-volatile memory

ƒ During inactivity periods with ignition off, the duty trace will remain on rest
and the speed trace will remain at zero. Traces will be recorded for a
maximum of 24 Hours from the time of last chart insertion ensuring that no
traces will be overwritten

ƒ OEM specific CANBus versions are available for different vehicle manufacturer
types

ƒ Can be set-up to have a dedicated speedometer output for vehicles fitted with
a separate electronic speedometer

ƒ 2400 are NOT approved for use in hazardous goods vehicles

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 320
The 2400 Tachograph – Front View ‘With-Display’ Version

Driver Duty Button LCD Display Crew Duty Button

Driver Mode Drawer Crew


Advance
Duty Change Eject Duty
Button
LEDs Button Button LEDs

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 321

The 2400 Tachograph – Front View ‘No-Display’ Version

Driver Duty Button Crew Duty Button

Driver Drawer Crew


Duty Eject Duty
LEDs Button LEDs

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 322
The 2400 Tachograph – Rear View

D C B A

Rear Connectors –

‘C’ – Engine Speed, Red ‘A’ – Voltage, White

‘D’ – Auxiliary Signals, Brown ‘B’ – Vehicle Speed, Yellow

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 323

The 2400 Tachograph - Competitors Unit, Kienzle1324

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 324
The 2400 Tachograph – Driver-Duty Buttons

ƒ Two individual push buttons are provided, respectively for the current driver
and the co-driver or crew, for initiating a period of recorded duty. The
current driver is allocated the left hand Driver Duty push-button 1, while the
crew is allocated the right hand Driver Duty push-button 2
ƒ The mode of duty for the Driver or the Crew is selected by the appropriate
Duty push-button and displayed by LEDs immediately below the relevant
push-button. In order to change a mode of activity the Driver or Crew
member will press their respective Duty push-button a number of times,
until the LED indicating the required mode of duty is illuminated
ƒ The 2400 is a fully automatic Tachograph which means that the driver duty
status automatically reverts to Drive when the vehicle begins to move,
reflected by a Drive trace on the Driver 1 Chart, although the LED’s will
continue to reflect the most recently selected mode for Driver 1. Similarly
for the Crew, if the 2400 Tachograph ‘Crew Auto-Duty’ parameter is
enabled, when the vehicle begins to move the Crew duty status recorded
will automatically change from rest to available (1). The Crew Auto-Duty
parameter can be enabled or disabled using a MKII programmer as
described in section 3.3
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 325

The 2400 Tachographs – Mode Change & Advance Push


Buttons

ƒ The Mode Change push-button, which is identified by a


circular white dot ●, is used to select whether the display
indicates the odometer reading or the odometer trip
reading, and to adjust the time

ƒ If a 2400 Tachograph has been configured to display engine


Revs in RPM, then the mode change push-button will select
between RPM, Odometer and Trip distance

ƒ The Advance push-button, which is identified by a white


plus sign +, is used to reset the trip value to zero – press
and hold for 3 seconds in trip-mode, and to alter individual
field settings of the time and date as described below

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 326
The 2400 Tachograph – Eject Push Button

ƒ The Eject push-button, which is identified by the white


legend ▲, is pressed to open the drawer. When the Eject
push-button is pressed, a 3 mm radial line is drawn on the
Driver chart between the Duty and Distance traces to
record that the drawer is being opened, then the styli are
withdrawn from the charts

ƒ While the styli are retracting, the LED mode changes to the automatic
sequence shown below indicating that the Tachograph is carrying out
internal functions, in this case stylus retraction. Once the styli are fully
retracted, the LED mode reverts back to the flashing sequence also shown
below, indicating that the drawer can now be opened by the operator by
pushing the drawer at the oval emboss next to the eject button

ƒ It is not possible to open the drawer when the vehicle is in motion or when
the vehicle ignition is off, or if the power to the Tachograph is removed

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 327

The 2400 Tachograph – Eject Push Button – LED Sequences

LED Automatic
Sequence - styli
Retracting

LED Sequence –
Drawer Opening

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 328
The 2400 Tachograph – Display Modes

ƒ The display area of the fascia provides a continuous LCD indication of all
information that the operator will require during a journey

ƒ Four distinct modes of display are normally available,


• Two by pressing the Mode change button (●),
• NORMAL MODE, TRIP MODE,

• Two by pressing the Mode change button (●) and the advance
push-button (+) simultaneously,
• DTC VALUE DISPLAY MODE, DTC TIME AND DATE DISPLAY MODE

ƒ Note: The Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) modes are only available for
display if the internal ‘DTC Enable’ option is set

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 329

The 2400 Tachograph – Display Modes

NORMAL MODE TRIP MODE

DTC VALUE DTC TIME AND DATE


DISPLAY MODE DISPLAY MODE

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 330
The 2400 Tachograph – Display

ƒ The standard display features the following three distinct information areas,
• The upper right hand area of the display alternatively indicates,
• the odometer reading - the total cumulative distance travelled in
kilometres
• or the trip reading - the total distance travelled, in kilometres,
since the trip figure was last reset, up to a maximum of
9999.9km
In order to identify the display mode that is active, the trip
distance is prefixed with the letters ‘Tr’
• The lower right hand area of the display indicates the time in 24-hour
clock format as a four-figure number, with a flashing colon separating
the hours from the minutes. The colon flashes when the correct
chart time has been found and indicates chart recording has started
• The left-hand side of the display indicates the current speed of the
vehicle, expressed in kilometres per hour, km/h

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 331

The 2400 Tachograph – Adjusting the Time

ƒ The time setting actions for a 2400 Tachograph is dependant on whether or


not the unit has an internal battery-backed real-time clock, RTC, fitted

ƒ For units with an RTC fitted, the master time and date for the Tachograph
can only be set using a MKII Tachograph programmer as described in
section 3.3. The user controls can only be used to set a local time which is
based on an offset value applied to the master RTC time

ƒ For units without an RTC fitted, the master time and date and the local
(offset) time are always the same and they can be set using either a MKII
programmer or by using the user controls on the front of the Tachograph

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 332
The 2400 Tachograph – Adjusting the Time – Non-RTC Units

ƒ The displayed time can only be changed with the drawer open. A 2400 must
be switched to the Time Adjust mode by pressing the Mode Change push-
button (●) for more than 3 seconds. In this mode, the Mode Change push-
button (●) is used to switch between the various time/date fields while the
Advance push-button (+) is used to increase the displayed value in the
current field

ƒ The adjustment process can be carried out on six fields as follows,


• hours (two digits) and minutes (two digits) colon (:) separated,
• month (two digits) and day (one or two digits) colon (:) separated,
• 1st two digits for the year and the 2nd two digits for the century

ƒ If no key is pressed for 10 seconds during the clock setup procedure, then
the settings changed only up to that point are retained. On completion of the
clock setup procedure, i.e. after all six fields have been set, press the Mode
change (●) push-button again to save the settings and to exit the Time
Adjust Mode
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 333

The 2400 Tachograph – Adjusting the Time – RTC Units

ƒ In a unit with a battery-backed real-time clock, the master internal time is


‘remembered’ by the unit when power is removed. A user can only adjust an
OFFSET around that time i.e., for setting a local time. The ranges of the
offset are –23h 59m to +23h 59m

ƒ To adjust the time Offset, press the Mode Change push-button (●) for more
than 3 seconds with the drawer open to initiate the change mode. Adjust the
Offset using the Mode Change push-button (●) to switch between hours and
minutes and the Advance push-button (+) to increase the displayed value in
the current field. If no key is pressed for 10 seconds during the Offset time
setting procedure, then the current displayed time will be retained. On
completion, press the Mode change (●) button again to save the settings

ƒ When the clock adjust mode is entered, both time and date are shown on the
display, i.e.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 334
The 2400 Tachograph – Chart Fitting

ƒ The Tachograph chart is a record of the driver's activity and therefore each
driver and co-driver must have their own chart, which they should take with
them when they change vehicle. The instrument is so designed that the
driver's chart records work mode, speed and distance, whilst the co-driver's
chart only records work mode

ƒ If a vehicle is double manned, it is important that the charts are inserted


correctly and in sequence - co-driver first and main driver second - as the
chart insertion method for driver and co-driver differs slightly. Also if the
co-driver takes over the driving duties and the driver becomes the co-driver
during the shift, their charts must also change places so that the new driver
can record speed and distance on his chart

ƒ A co-driver chart must not be fitted when a 2400 is being used for single
Driver operation. However, after the driver chart is installed and the
drawer is closed, the crew LEDs will indicate that a chart is missing, but
these may be ignored

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 335

The 2400 Tachograph – Chart Fitting – Co-driver

ƒ The Tachograph drawer must be opened by pressing the Eject push-button.


The vehicle must be stationary with the ignition switched on

ƒ The LEDs will illuminate in turn, as described above to indicate that the styli
are being withdrawn, and then to alternately flashing, Driver LEDs and
Crew LEDs, to indicate that the drawer can be opened

ƒ Push the front of the drawer in the position shown - DO NOT press on the
display

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 336
The 2400 Tachograph – Chart Fitting – Co-driver

ƒ This will cause the drawer to unlatch and spring forward to the partly open
position

ƒ The drawer can now be carefully pulled out to its fully extended position, as
shown. The chart table, upon which the chart locates, is now exposed to
facilitate easy insertion of the chart

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 337

The 2400 Tachograph – Chart Fitting – Co-driver

ƒ Rotate the chart table so that the thin end of the pear shaped drive
spindle on the table is facing 12 o’clock

ƒ With the face of the chart uppermost, insert the edge of the chart
through the transverse slot between the front and rear chart platens, as
shown. Then carefully locate the chart over the pear-shaped drive
spindle such that the thin end of the pear-shaped hole in the centre of
the chart is located first

Fit crew chart


under chart
table plate

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 338
The 2400 Tachograph – Chart Fitting – Driver

ƒ Again rotate the chart table so that the thin end of the pear shaped drive
spindle on the table is facing 12 o’clock

ƒ With the face of the chart uppermost, insert the edge of the chart such
that its edge locates under the two location fingers at the rear of the
chart table, as shown. Carefully locate the chart over the pear-shaped
drive spindle such that the thin end of the pear-shaped hole in the centre
of the chart is located first – make sure the chart is located over the pips
on the spindle

Fit driver chart


under location Locate chart
fingers over pips

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 339

The 2400 Tachograph – Chart Fitting

ƒ After the charts are inserted, close the drawer by pushing it forward only
in the position as shown above until it is mechanically latched

ƒ The Tachograph will then carry out internal procedures to align the
charts to correspond with the correct time and to deploy the styli

ƒ These procedures, which are automatic operations, are usually


completed after a short time, typically 40 seconds, but may take up to 90
seconds in some cases. The Tachograph will only start recording when
the colon in the clock begins flashing

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 340
The 2400 Tachograph – Chart Recording in Stationary Vehicle
with Ignition Off

ƒ When a vehicle is stationary with ignition off, the stylus movement is


minimised, thus reducing the overall acoustic output of the 2400. This is
known as the quiet running mode

ƒ If the following conditions are present,


• Driver duty (and if appropriate, Crew duty) set to Rest,
• Zero speed,
• Ignition OFF,
• Fourth trace OFF (i.e. no events and/or zero engine speed)
ƒ Then the speed rack will remain positioned at the zero speed mark. The
duty rack will position itself in the Driver duty Rest position. The chart
table will continue to rotate and this will cause a 0km/h Speed trace
and a driver Duty Rest trace to be drawn but NO distance trace will be
recorded as shown below

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 341

The 2400 Tachograph – Chart Recording in Stationary Vehicle


with Ignition Off

Duty trace
remains in
‘Rest’ position

No distance
trace recorded

Speed trace
remains at
0 km/h mark

ƒ If the vehicle moves, or the ignition is switched on, or the drawer is


ejected, then the speed, duty and distance traces will revert to being
recorded in the usual manner
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 342
The 2400 Tachograph – Bench Testing

ƒ Bench testing of a 2400 Tachograph must be carried out in conjunction


with a MKII Programmer and with the 2400 Tachograph REMOVED from
the vehicle

ƒ The method of Bench testing a 2400 Tachograph is fully described in the


next section

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 343

The 2400 Tachograph – Installation - Power Connections

ƒ An AMP mini timer plug, 2714-265 and terminals, 2714-270 are used with
automotive insulated cable 1 mm2 to make up the appropriate power loom
for a 2400 Tachograph as shown

2714-265
ILLUMINATION (Housing Natural)
AND
IGNITION 2714-270 (tabs)

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 344
The 2400 Tachograph – Installation - Sender Connections

ƒ The connections for a standard 4-wire Tachograph sender input connector


are as listed in the table below. Pins 5 to 8 are not connected to the
sender, but are used for output signals as described. A full description of
all 2400 Tachograph rear connections is included as Appendix A of the
2400 section of the Training Manual

Socket B Function
Pin 1 Positive supply to sender
Pin 2 Negative supply to sender
Pin 3 Main channel input
Pin 4 Encrypted or Complimentary Input
Pin 5 Dual-axle setting
Pin 6 V-pulse – customer specified
Pin 7 V-pulse – ISO
Pin 8 4-pulses per metre

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 345

The 2400 Tachograph – Installation - General

ƒ A Tachograph Installation Kit, 7450-330 is available to aid fitting the 2400


Tachograph in a vehicle. The kit consists of,
• a 2400 power harness - 1 metre long, 7450-360
• a self-threading nut with integral washer, 6450-132
• a universal mounting strip, 6450-130
• a Tachograph cage, 6450-129
• a rubber acorn, 6450-061
• a pair of Tachograph removal tools, 6350-023

ƒ When installing a Tachograph, first pull the wires through from the back of
the cavity and insert the radio cage into the enclosure. It is very important
that the wires are of a suitable length to allow the unit to be moved in and
out of the slot when connected. Equally important is to allow the wires
enough space at the rear of the unit so that it can sit in place without
crushing the wires as this puts strain on both the wires and the
Tachograph
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 346
The 2400 Tachograph – Installation - General

ƒ After installation, the Tachograph must be supported at the rear of the


unit. Placing the rubber acorn onto the peg at the rear of the unit and
using this to support the unit will achieve this

ƒ Alternatively a universal mounting strip and self-threading nut can be used


to aid the support of the Tachograph. One end of the mounting strip is
placed over the Tachograph rear peg and then secured with the self-
threading nut screwed onto the peg. The other end of the strip can then
be fixed to the vehicle to secure the rear of the Tachograph

ƒ The angle of installation of a 2400 Tachograph must not be greater than


45° from the horizontal to prevent the drawer from slamming open or
shut

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 347

The 2400 Tachograph – Removing the Tachograph

ƒ The 2400 Tachograph may be removed with the drawer open or closed.
With the drawer closed, four small holes can be seen at the sides of the
plastic front fascia, as shown. To remove the unit, a pair of Tachograph
extraction tools, 6350-023, should be inserted into the two pairs of holes,
with the tools perpendicular to the Tachograph. Once pushed in, both
extraction tools should be pushed out sideways and then pulled at the
same time. The tools will grip the unit and enable it to be pulled out

Four
Removal
Holes

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 348
The 2400 Tachograph – Opening the Drawer Whilst
Disconnected

ƒ In the event of a power disconnection or failure the 2400 drawer may only
be opened - to access charts - after removing the unit from the dashboard
to gain access to the release mechanism at the rear of the Tachograph

ƒ At the rear of a 2400 as shown, there is a small hole. If a Drawer-Eject


tool (6450-131) is inserted and light pressure is applied to the fascia, the
drawer will unlock and spring out. This method must only be used when
there is no power present. Opening the drawer using this method,
when the unit is powered, may result in damage to the
Tachograph

Drawer Release Hole

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 349

The 2400 Tachograph – Calibration and Programming

ƒ The vehicle should be calibrated using an approved method as previously


described. When the vehicle calibration parameter (W-factor) has been
determined this value should be programmed as the calibration factor for the
Tachograph (K-factor)

ƒ The K-factor for a 2400 Tachograph can be set using a MKII Tachograph
programmer, or any other VOSA approved programming device. The method
for programming this parameter and other 2400 parameters is fully explained
in section 3.3

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 350
The 2400 Tachograph – Checking the System Installation

ƒ It is a VOSA requirement to prove that the Tachograph installation is correct


by carrying out a Tachograph test after the installation into the vehicle

ƒ The procedure for testing a 2400 Tachograph that is installed in a vehicle is as


follows:
• Switch on ignition, switch on the vehicle sidelights and check that the
Tachograph display lights are illuminated and that the duty LEDs are
on and that all driver duties can be selected
• Drive the vehicle onto a rolling-road and accelerate the vehicle on the
rolling road rollers until the speed reading on the rolling road console/
controller is 50 km/h. Hold the speed at 50 km/h and check that the
2400 displays a speed of 50 km/h ±4 km/h. Decelerate the vehicle to
a stop and check that the 2400 speed returns to zero. If a rolling-road
is not available the vehicle must be road tested to ensure the 2400
responds to vehicle speed changes

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 351

The 2400 Tachograph – Input and Output Signals –


Communication Interfaces – CANbus

ƒ CANbus Interface - The CANbus interface connections and descriptions are


shown in the Table below,

PIN NUMBER DESCRIPTION


A4 CAN HIGH
A7 CAN GROUND
A8 CAN LOW
C5 CAN HIGH
C6 CAN GROUND
C7 CAN LOW
C8 Internal resistor to CAN HIGH

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 352
The 2400 Tachograph – Input and Output Signals –
Communication Interfaces – CANbus

ƒ CAN – Controller Area Network – a versatile vehicle communications system.


It is a serial bus system useful as an open communication system for
intelligent devices such as the 2400 Tachograph. It functions as an interface
between the Tachograph and the vehicle instrument cluster

ƒ CANbus types supported by the 2400 are,

• Daimler-Chrysler Renault,

• MAN Volvo,

• DAF Iveco,

• Scania ISO

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 353

The 2400 Tachograph – Input and Output Signals –


Communication Interfaces – CANbus

ƒ The CANbus capability of the 2400 must be disabled using the MKII
Programmer when no CANbus is present in the vehicle. The CANbus driver
integrated circuit is used as an interface between the CAN controller and the
data bus. The transmitter outputs CAN LOW and CAN HIGH are protected
against short circuits and electrical transients, which may occur in an
automotive environment

ƒ In case of short circuit, CAN HIGH to CAN LOW, CAN HIGH to ground, CAN
LOW to ground, the protection circuit recognizes this fault condition and the
transmitter output stages are disabled

ƒ Typical parameters that can be transmitted through the CANbus network


include:
• Speed, Time, Driver Duty, Distance Travelled (odometer)

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 354
The 2400 Tachograph – Input and Output Signals –
Communication Interfaces – K-line

ƒ K-line Interface - A K-line driver integrated circuit is used to implement


the K-line interface

ƒ This is a bi-directional serial communication interface in accordance with


ISO 9141. The K-line interface is used for device diagnostics and for the
configuration of the Tachograph

ƒ The Stoneridge MKII Tachograph Programmer uses the K-line Interface to


communicate with the 2400 Tachograph via the front D-shaped connector

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 355

The 2400 Tachograph – Input and Output Signals

ƒ Events Inputs - These inputs are used to record events on the Tachograph
chart

ƒ Events inputs respond to signal levels in excess of 4V

ƒ Event input 1 is the input that signals that ‘event 1’ will be registered on the
Event Trace
• Rear Connector Pin D1 is used for the Event 1 Input

ƒ Event input 2 is the input that signals that ‘event 2’ will be registered on the
Event Trace
• Rear Connector Pin D2 is used for the Event 2 Input

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 356
The 2400 Tachograph – Input and Output Signals

ƒ Engine Revs Input

ƒ The Revs 1 input signal is monitored by the processor and is used to


determine engine speed. The input line is normally connected to the W-
terminal of the alternator

ƒ The Revs 2 input signal is monitored by the processor and is used to


determine engine speed

ƒ Engine speed can be measured by monitoring either the signal from a revs
sender, rear connector Pin C4, or from the W-terminal of the alternator rear
connector Pin C3

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 357

The 2400 Tachograph – Input and Output Signals

ƒ Dual Ratio Rear Axle Input - When a 2400 Tachograph is configured to


accommodate Dual Ratio Rear Axle units this input is used to monitor the
status of an electrical switch integrated with the rear axle ratio setting
control mechanism
ƒ When the input line is pulled low the speed displayed and recorded by the
Tachograph is multiplied by a factor that reflects the change in gear ratio
implemented by the dual speed rear axle mechanism. A MKII Programmer,
can be used to modify the multiplication factor
• Rear Connector Pin B5 is used for the Dual Ratio Rear Axle Input
Signal

ƒ Real-time Input from Sender - This input interface monitors and


conditions the pulse signal from the speed sender mounted on the vehicle
transmission system. This signal is referred to as the Real-Time signal
• Rear Connector Pin B3 is used for the Real-time input from the
sender
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 358
The 2400 Tachograph – Input and Output Signals

ƒ Complimentary Input from sender - This interface has two modes of


operation depending on whether the 2400 is configured for connection to a
4-wire sender or an encrypted sender

ƒ For a 4-wire sender, the input is purely an interface that monitors and
conditions the pulse signal from the speed sender. This signal is the
complement of the Real-Time speed sender signal and is referred to as the
Complementary signal. It is compared with the Real-Time signal to verify
sender signal integrity. For an encrypted sender, the input supports a bi-
directional data link between the processor in the 2400 Tachograph and the
encrypted sender. The data on this channel is used to verify the signal
integrity of the sender

• Rear Connector Pin B4 is used for the sender Complimentary Input


Signal

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 359

The 2400 Tachograph – Input and Output Signals

ƒ V-Pulse Output - The V-Pulse output interface is a positive going pulse


output signal that is triggered by each pulse from the speed/distance
sender
• Rear Connector Pin B7 is used for the standard ISO V-Pulse output
signal
• Pin B6 can be used as an alternative customer variant V-Pulse
signal available in ISO or Open Collector formats

ƒ 4-Pulses per Metre Output - The 4-Pulses Per Metre output interface
is an output string of positive pulses generated at a rate where 4 pulses
correspond to one metre
• Rear Connector Pin B8 is used for the 4-Pulses Per Metre signal

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 360
The 2400 Tachograph – Input and Output Signals

ƒ Overspeed Output - The Overspeed Output is active when an overspeed


condition is detected
• Rear Connector Pin D5 is used for the Overspeed Output signal

ƒ Speedometer Output - The Speedometer Output signal is a rectangular


output waveform that is used to drive the vehicles’ speedometer so that it
displays the correct speed. A speedometer output calibration factor must be
programmed into the Tachograph in order for the correct speed to be
displayed
• Rear Connector Pin D6 is used for the Speedometer Output signal,
and it should be noted that for some 2400 customer types, this
output would have been factory initialised as an open-collector output
as opposed to the standard ISO configuration

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 361

The 2400 Tachograph – Input and Output Signals

ƒ Serial Data Output - The Serial Data Output channel is used to


continuously transmit speed, distance, time, date, engine revs, driver and
crew duty information in a Stoneridge Electronics proprietary serial data
format

• Rear Connector Pin D8 is used for the Serial Data Output signal

ƒ General Warning Output - The General Warning Output allows options


for Low-Speed, DTC Warnings or Chart Change Warnings, or the output may
be disabled

• Rear Connector Pin D4 is used for the General Warning Output

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 362
Section 3.3

Using The MKII Programmer With


the 2400 Tachograph

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 363

The MKII Programmer – Tachograph Type Selection

ƒ Before using the Programmer, the model of


Tachograph to be interfaced with must be selected
VR2400 MAIN MENU
from the Main Menu. When the Programmer is
:TACHO SELECT
switched on the first item displayed on the ‘MAIN
MENU’ is ‘TACHO SELECT’. From elsewhere in the
‘MAIN MENU’ press the ← or → keys until ‘TACHO
SELECT’ is displayed

ƒ Press ENTER and the ‘TACHO TYPE’ menu will be


displayed. Press ENTER again and then use the ← TACHO TYPE
or → keys to select the appropriate Tachograph :2400 Series
type i.e. Stoneridge VR2400. Press ENTER to make
the selection and then MENU to return to the MAIN
MENU

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 364
The MKII Programmer – Sender Selection 2400

ƒ For Stoneridge VR2400 series Tachographs, the


VR2400 MAIN MENU
sender type must be selected
:PULSER SELECT

ƒ With the Programmer at the VR2400 MAIN MENU


and displaying ‘PULSER SELECT’, connect a Cable U SENDER TYPE
between the Programmers’ Socket ‘C’ and the 2400 :Encrypted ← →
Tachograph 6-way D-shaped socket and then press
ENTER

ƒ Note: Use the ← or → keys to scroll through the options until the
preferred sender type is displayed. Press ENTER and again to confirm the
selection

ƒ The four choices available for sender Type are,


• Encrypted, 4-Wire, 3-Wire and Magnetic

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 365

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Interfacing the MKII to the
Tachograph

ƒ Interfacing of the MKII Programmer to a 2400 Tachograph is done via the


MKII 8-pin DIN connector and the 2400 6-way front calibration connector

ƒ Both connectors are keyed so that wrongly inserting them is not possible

ƒ The 2400 6-way connector is exposed by first opening the drawer and
removing the sealed programming socket cover-clip as shown below

ƒ For most tests, the programmer is connected to the 2400 using a special
2400 calibration/programming cable, part number 7780-936, as shown

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 366
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Interfacing the MKII to the
Tachograph

Insert DIN Connector into MKII


Programmer 8-Way DIN Socket

2400 6-way Programming Socket


with Sealed Cover-clip removed

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 367

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Bench Test

ƒ Before installation, and during recalibration it is a Legal requirement to carry


out a Tachograph Bench Test with the Tachograph removed from the
vehicle. This requires the unit to be run at different speeds for different
periods of time and with different driver duty modes selected

ƒ The Tachograph Programmer provides a test signal simulating the pulser


output which gives the required speed outputs for the required times. The
only operator intervention is then to set the duty modes at the appropriate
times as indicated by the Programmer. The programmer is connected to the
2400 using a Tachograph drive lead, 7780-981 similar to that shown below

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 368
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Bench Test

ƒ Before performing the Bench Test it must be ensured that the ‘UK’ Bench Test
is selected via the Diagnostics menu. It is recommended that a Clock Test is
performed on the Tachograph prior to Bench Testing
From the MAIN MENU select BENCH VR2400 MAINMENU
TEST using the ← and → keys, and press :BENCH TEST
ENTER.

Select the Tachograph scale (125, 140 or Select the scale


180 km/h) using the ← and → keys, and : 125 km/h ← →
press ENTER.

Set the Tachograph to a K-factor of 8000 Select K-factor


(remember to note the original setting :8000 Pul/km?
first). Press ENTER.
Note: for a 2400 it is easier to read in the
current K-factor value prior to the bench
test and then use this value.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 369

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Bench Test

Select whether changing the driver Duty is Auto Duty


to be automatically or manually. :Off ←→
Press Enter to accept current setting or the
← and → keys to change.

Make sure the 2400 LCD display backlight is Check backlight


illuminated. illuminated
Note: this task should be ignored for a ‘No-
display’ version of the 2400.

Perform the task displayed. Press ENTER on Prepare and


completion. insert 2 charts
Note: For dual driver Tachographs, 2
charts must be inserted. For a single
driver, only 1 chart has to be inserted.

Set the driver and crew duty to active (4). Driver=Active


Press ENTER on completion. Crew=Active

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 370
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Bench Test

The speed will now be maximum speed for Speed: 125 km/h
the selected scale for 10 seconds and the Time: 10 s
time will count down to zero and then an
audible beep will be heard.

The speed displayed will then go to 0km/h Speed: 0 km/h


for 10 seconds (the time will count down to Time: 10 s
zero) and an audible beep will be heard
again.

Note the current odometer reading on the Note odometer


Tachograph. This will be required later to reading
check the accuracy of the odometer. Press
ENTER.

The speed will now go to 40km/h and will Speed: 40 km/h


be held for 2½ minutes (the time will count Time: 150s
down to zero). At the end of the 2½
minute test there will be an audible beep.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 371

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Bench Test

The speed will then go up to 80 km/h. After Speed: 80 km/h


a further 2½ minutes (the time will count Time: 150s
down to zero) there will again be an audible
beep indicating the end of that test.

The speed will move up to 100 km/h for a Speed: 100 km/h
further 3 minutes (the time will count down Time: 180s
to zero). At the end of the time there will
be a further beep and the speed will return
to zero.

Set the driver and crew duty to active (4). Driver=Active


Press ENTER on completion. Crew=Active

The unit will record Active (4) duty for 2 Recording duty
minutes (the time will count down to zero). Time: 120 s
After that time an audible beep will be
heard.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 372
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Bench Test

Set the driver and crew duty to passive (1). Driver=Passive


Press ENTER on completion. Crew=Passive

The unit will record Passive (1) duty for 2 Recording duty
minutes (the time will count down to zero). Time: 120 s
After that time an audible beep will be
heard.

Set the driver and crew duty to rest (2). Driver=Rest


Press ENTER on completion. Crew=Rest

The unit will record Rest (2) duty for 2 Recording duty
minutes (the time will count down to zero). Time: 120 s
After that time an audible beep will be
heard.

Compare the new odometer reading with Check odometer


that noted above - a difference of 10km is added 10 km
expected.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 373

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Bench Test

ƒ Note: carry out ‘sender disconnect’ and ‘power interrupt’ tests to complete
the bench test – DO NOT EJECT the 2400 drawer until the clock colon is
flashing to indicate the Tachograph is recording

Open the 2400 Tachograph and check that Check clock


the time on the chart corresponds with the to chart time
time indicated on the clock. Press ENTER
on completion.

Remove the chart(s) and check the traces Check chart rec.
have been completed satisfactorily – speed, Set K for veh.
duty & distance traces on driver chart and
duty trace on crew chart (if fitted). Press
ENTER on completion.

Press the ENTER key to complete the test VR2400 MAIN MENU
and return to the MAIN MENU. :BENCH TEST

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 374
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Clock Test

ƒ A Tachograph clock test can be carried out on 2400 Tachographs using a


direct MKII-Tachograph connection via a 2400 calibration cable, 7780-936
ƒ The method of the test is as shown below,

From the MAIN MENU select CLOCK TEST VR2400 MAIN MENU
using the ← and → keys. Press ENTER to :CLOCK TEST
start the test.

The Programmer will display the message Testing clock


‘Sending Data’ then ‘Testing Clock’ as shown.

After a short time the clock accuracy in Clock Accuracy


seconds per day will be displayed. +0.2s/day

In the case of a lack of signal from the ERROR! No signal


Tachograph (caused usually by a faulty cable
connection to the Tachograph) the
programmer will display an error message.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 375

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Control Menu Functions

ƒ For a 2400 Tachograph, this menu can be used to reset the Tachograph or to
pair the Tachograph with a KITAS1 encrypted sender

ƒ The Programmer is connected to the 2400 using a 2400 Calibration cable,


7780-936. The method of the test is as shown,

From the MAIN MENU select ‘TACHO VR2400 MAIN MENU


CONTROL’ using the ← or → keys, and :TACHO CONTROL
press ENTER.

From the CONTROL MENU make the CONTROL MENU


required selection - using the ← or → : Pair sender
keys to select Reset tacho or Pair
sender. Press ENTER to confirm the
selection.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 376
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Control Menu Functions

In the case of ‘Reset tacho’, the CONTROL MENU


programmer will cause the Tachograph to : Reset tacho
simulate a Power Off/On Condition.

In the case of ‘Pair sender’, press ENTER Sending data


and the sender will pair automatically Data transfer OK
within 60 seconds.

Note: When paired to an encrypted sender,


the Tachograph recognises only that
sender. The signal from the sender
becomes unique to the Tachograph that it
is paired with.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 377

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Identify Tachograph Function

ƒ This function interrogates a 2400 Tachograph via its K-line connection.


Parameters that can be observed for a 2400 are; System supplier,
Manufacture date, Serial number, Hardware version, Software number,
Software version and System name

ƒ The Programmer is connected to the 2400 using a 2400 Calibration cable,


7780-936. The method of the test is as shown,

The From the MAIN MENU use the ← and VR2400 MAIN MENU
→ keys to select IDENTIFY TACHO. :IDENTIFY TACHO

Press ENTER and the Programmer will


interrogate the Tachograph. Use the ←
and → keys to scroll through the available
Tachograph parameter options as listed
above.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 378
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Read / Erase DTCs
Function

ƒ This function interrogates a 2400 Tachograph via its K-line connection and
enables the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) stored in the Tachograph to be
displayed on the Programmer and then erased from the Tachographs
memory if required. A full list of 2400 DTCs is included as Appendix B of the
2400 section in the Training Manual

ƒ The programmer is connected to the 2400 using a 2400 Calibration cable,


7780-936. The method of the test is as shown,

From the MAIN MENU select VR2400 MAIN MENU


READ/ERASE DTCS using the ← or → :READ/ERASE DTCS
keys, and press ENTER.

If no connection is made, an error TRANSFER FAILURE


message will be displayed, before
returning to the main menu.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 379

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Read / Erase DTCs


Function

If the connections are made, the Reading Data


programmer will read the DTCs data from
the Tachograph and messages will be Please Wait
displayed to indicate this.

For a 2400 Tachograph, a DTC screen DTC=A423 Cnt=1


will then be displayed, typically as shown 14:42 10/07/2005
opposite.
Use the ↑ and ↓ keys to check all the
other Tachograph stored DTCs.
Press the DELETE key to delete an
individual displayed DTC from the
Tachographs memory.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 380
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Read / Erase DTCs
Function

Press the ENTER key to erase all the Press <ENTER>


stored DTCs from the Tachographs to clear DTCs
memory.

Press the MENU key to return to the main VR2400 MAIN MENU
menu without erasing any of the :READ/ERASE DTCS
Tachograph stored DTCs.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 381

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph

ƒ The MKII Programmer supports programming of the Stoneridge 2400 series


Tachograph

ƒ The Programmer is connected to the 2400 using a 2400 Calibration/


Programming cable, 7780-936. The method of the test is as shown below

ƒ It should be noted that in all cases, once settings have been altered, the
SEND ALL DATA command can be used to transfer all the information at the
end. It is, however, possible to send each individual setting after alteration
by pressing the SEND key

ƒ Care must be taken when using SEND ALL DATA that no parameters are
accidentally overwritten with a wrong value which in extreme cases may
cause a vehicle to malfunction. Using the SEND key to individually transmit
parameters is more time consuming but is much safer in terms of
accidentally overwriting a Tachograph parameter with a wrong value

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 382
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,
Reading Parameters

ƒ All interaction between a MKII Programmer and a 2400 Tachograph is


controlled by the MKII Programmer

ƒ Initially the parameters must be read from the 2400 Tachograph and a copy
transferred to the Programmer. The MKII ‘READ ALL DATA’ 2400 Main menu
option is used to do this

ƒ The Programmer menu screens should be scrolled through using the ‘Left’ and
‘Right’ arrow buttons until the ‘READ ALL DATA’ option is shown

2400 MAIN MENU


:READ ALL DATA

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 383

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,


Reading and Modifying Parameters

ƒ Press the Programmer ‘ENTER’ button to initiate the parameter data transfer
from the 2400 Tachograph to the MKII Programmer. The Programmer will
display the message shown while the data is being transferred and then a
second message as shown once the parameter transfer is completed

Reading data Data transfer OK


........

ƒ Once the VU parameters have been ‘read’ into the Programmer they can
then be modified individually

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 384
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,
Modifying and Sending Individual Parameters

ƒ The 2400 parameters can be modified using the Programmer ‘MODIFY DATA’
Main menu option. A full list of the ‘read’ parameters that can be modified is
given below

2400 MAIN MENU


:MODIFY DATA

ƒ Once a parameter has been modified the new value can then be ‘sent’
back to the 2400. The Programmer ‘SEND’ key can be used to transmit
individual parameters. The display will be as shown

Sending Data Sending Data


Data transfer OK

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 385

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,


Sending All Parameters

ƒ It is also possible to reprogram a 2400 Tachograph with a whole set of


updated parameters. The ‘SEND ALL DATA’ Main menu option can be used to
do this

2400 MAIN MENU


:SEND ALL DATA

ƒ Press the MKII Programmer ‘ENTER’ button to initiate the parameter data
transfer from the Programmer to the Tachograph. The MKII will display
the message shown whilst the data is being transferred

Sending data
........
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 386
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,
Sending All Parameters & Checking Updated Parameters

ƒ Once the parameter transfer to the Tachograph is completed, the Programmer


will display the message shown

Data transfer OK

ƒ The successful transmission of the parameters can be confirmed by ‘reading’


back the parameters from the Tachograph as described previously and then
using the ‘modify’ function to check the new values have been programmed
correctly

2400 MAIN MENU 2400 MAIN MENU


:READ ALL DATA :MODIFY DATA

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 387

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,


Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ As explained above, once the 2400 parameters have been ‘read’ into the MKII
Programmer, they can be modified using the MKII ‘MODIFY DATA’ Main menu
option. Press the Programmer ‘ENTER’ button to enter the ‘Modify Data’ sub-
menu
2400 MAIN MENU
:MODIFY DATA

ƒ Press the ‘Left’ and ‘Right’ Programmer arrow buttons to scroll through the
parameters that can be modified, e.g. K-factor as shown. The updated
parameters can then be ‘sent’ back to the 2400 as explained previously

K-factor
:8000

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 388
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,
Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ 2400 Parameters which may be Programmed are:

• K-Factor, Current Date, Ign On Record,


• Odometer reading, Time Offset, Crew Auto Duty,
• Pulses Per Engine Revolution, Output Shaft Factor, 7 Day Eject PIN,
• Engine Speed Recording, 4th Chart Trace, VIN,
• CANBus RPM, CANBus Enabled, Service Delay,
• RPM Display, Customer Type, Install Date,
• Odo Leading 0s, Dual Axle, Reset Heartbeat,
• Overspeed Flash, Dual Axle Ratio, Analogue Revs,
• DTCs Enabled, Speedo OP Factor, Pin D4 Function,
• Overspeed, D6 Pin Function, Low Speed Limit,
• Current Time, Serial Comms, Kline Speedo

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 389

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,


Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ K-factor – Press ‘ENTER’ and key in the new value. Press ‘ENTER’ again to
confirm the value

K-factor
:8000

ƒ Odometer – Press ‘ENTER’ and key in the new value. The last digit input is
tenths, thus an odometer reading of 100.0 km should be input as 1000. Press
‘ENTER’ again to confirm the new value. Note: the value can be programmed
above 1000 km ONLY ONCE

Odometer
:000548.7

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 390
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,
Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Pulses Per Engine Revolution – Press ENTER and a cursor will flash. Key
in the required PPR value and press ENTER. Bear in mind that the last three
digits are thousandths and the number 19.000 must be typed in as 19000

Pulses per Rev


:19.000

ƒ Engine Speed Recording – Select each of the engine speed recording


bands (Low Power, Economy and Poor Economy) in turn. Press ENTER and
characters ← → will appear. Use the ← and → keys to select the required
value and terminate by pressing ENTER
Note: the Programmer will not allow entry of inconsistent engine speed
bands. For example, the user may not set a minimum speed for the Economy
band which is lower than the speed defined for the Low Power band

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 391

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,


Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Engine Speed Recording (continued) –

Low Power Band


:700 Revs/min

Economy Band
:900 Revs/min

Poor Economy
:1100 Revs/min

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 392
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,
Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ CANBus RPM – Press ENTER and use the ← and → keys to select ON or
OFF. Press ENTER to confirm the selection

CANBus RPM
:Off ←→

ƒ RPM Display – Press ENTER and use the ← and → keys to select ON or OFF.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection

RPM display
:Off ←→

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 393

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,


Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Odo Leading Zeros – Press ENTER and use the ← and → keys to select ON
or OFF. Press ENTER to confirm the selection

Odo leading 0s
:Off ←→

ƒ Overspeed flash – Press ENTER and use the ← and → keys to select ON or
OFF. Press ENTER to confirm the selection

Overspeed flash
:Off ←→

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 394
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,
Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ DTCs Enabled – Press ENTER and use the ← and → keys to select ON or
OFF to enable or disable DTC display. Press ENTER to confirm the selection
Note: DTC recording is NOT affected by this parameter

DTCs enabled
:Off ←→

ƒ Overspeed – Press ENTER and a cursor will flash. Key in the required over
speed value and press ENTER

Overspeed
:90 km/h

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 395

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,


Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Current time – Press ENTER and a cursor will flash. Key in the current time
and press ENTER. The time can also be set via the keys on the fascia of the
2400 Tachograph for non-RTC units

Current time
:10:35

ƒ Current date – Press ENTER and a cursor will flash. Key in the current date
and press ENTER. The date can also be set via the keys on the fascia of the
2400 Tachograph for non-RTC units

Current date
:05/06/2007

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 396
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,
Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Time offset – Press ENTER and use the up/down arrow keys to choose a
time offset between +23:00 and –23:00 hours

Time offset
:+1:00

ƒ Output shaft factor – This value should not be changed from the vehicle
factory set value

O/P shaft factor


:8.140

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 397

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,


Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ 4th Chart Trace – Press ENTER and use the ← and → keys to select ON or
OFF. Press ENTER to confirm the selection

4th chart trace


:Off ←→

ƒ CANBus enabled – Press ENTER and use the ← and → keys to select ON or
OFF. Press ENTER to confirm the selection

CANBus enabled
:Off ←→

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 398
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,
Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Customer Type – Press ENTER and use the ← and → keys to select the
CANBus type required. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Options are:
ISO, Renault, Scania, MAN, DC, Ford, VW, DAF, Volvo Bus and Volvo AH

Customer type
:ISO ←→

ƒ Dual Axle – Press ENTER and use the ← and → keys to select ON or OFF.
Press ENTER to confirm the selection

Dual Axle
:Off ←→

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 399

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,


Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Dual axle ratio – Press ENTER and type the value of the Dual Axle Ratio
required. Press ENTER to confirm the selection

Dual axle ratio


:1.3750

ƒ Serial comms – Press ENTER and use the ← and → keys to select Standard
or Extended data. Press ENTER to confirm the selection

Serial comms
:Standard data ← →

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 400
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,
Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Speedo output factor – Press ENTER and a cursor will flash. Key in the
required value and press ENTER to confirm the selection

Speedo OP factor
:4971

ƒ D6 pin function – Press ENTER and use the ← and → keys to select OFF,
Revs warning or Speedometer as required

D6 pin function
:OFF ←→

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 401

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,


Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Ignition on Record – Press ENTER and use the ← and → keys to select ON
or OFF. Press ENTER to confirm the selection

Ign On Record
:OFF ←→

ƒ Crew auto duty – Press ENTER and use the ← and → keys to select ON or
OFF. Press ENTER to confirm the selection

Crew auto duty


:OFF ←→

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 402
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,
Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ VIN – Press ENTER and key in the Vehicle Identification Number. This must
be 17 characters long. Press ENTER to confirm the selection

VIN
:1234567890ABCDEFG

ƒ Service Delay – Press ENTER and a cursor will flash. Key in the number of
WEEKS left until the compulsory check (maximum 104 weeks) or next
calibration of the Tachograph and press ENTER

Service delay
:104 weeks

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 403

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,


Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Install date – Press ENTER and a cursor will flash. Key in the date of
installation for the Tachograph and press ENTER

Install date
:04/05/2006

ƒ Reset Heartbeat – Press ENTER and use the ← and → keys to select ON or
OFF. Press ENTER to confirm the selection
Note: when set to ON the vehicle cluster presence is confirmed by the
Tachograph
Reset Heartbeat
:OFF ←→

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 404
Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,
Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Analogue Revs – Press ENTER and use the ← and → keys to select ON or
OFF. Press ENTER to confirm the selection

Analogue Revs
:OFF ←→

ƒ Pin D4 Function – Press ENTER and use the ← and → keys to select the
Pin D4 function required. Press ENTER to confirm the selection from: Off,
Dynafleet, Low Speed, Functions, DTC Warning and Chart Change

Pin D4 Function
:OFF ←→

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 405

Using the MKII with the 2400 – Programming the Tachograph,


Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Low speed Limit – Press ENTER and a cursor will flash. Key in the required
low speed value and press ENTER

Low Speed Limit


:5 km/h

ƒ Kline Speedo – Press ENTER and use the ← and → keys to select the Kline
Speedo function required. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Options are
Off or On
Kline Speedo
:OFF ←→

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 406
Using the MKII with 2400 – Practical Exercises

ƒ Use a MKII Programmer to execute a Bench test on an 2400 Tachograph

ƒ Use a MKII Programmer to Program an 2400 Tachograph with an overspeed


setting of 100 km/h

ƒ Use a MKII Programmer to Program an 2400 Tachograph for the ‘Ignition on


record’ function switched ON

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 407

Any Questions?

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 408
Section 3.4

1324 Radio Sized Tachograph

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 409

The 1324 Tachograph – Drawer Ejection

ƒ Open the Tachograph drawer by pressing and holding the Eject push-button
as shown. Speed input must be zero and ignition switched ON

ƒ The Tachograph screen will change to that shown, at which point the eject
button should be released

ƒ The Tachograph drawer will automatically eject to the position shown below.
If hours/minutes are flashing, the chart table needs to find the correct
position for the current time. Remove charts and close the drawer to
achieve this, then eject the drawer again as above and re-fit charts
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 410
The 1324 Tachograph – Drawer Ejection

ƒ The drawer should then be manually pulled forward as shown until the
chart table is fully exposed

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 411

The 1324 Tachograph – Chart Fitting – Co-driver

ƒ The chart table separator plate should be lifted as shown. With the face of
the crew chart uppermost, insert the edge of the chart underneath the rear
of the separation plate and then carefully locate the chart over the pear-
shaped drive spindle such that the thin end of the pear-shaped hole in
centre of the chart is located first. The chart separation plate may then be
dropped over the fitted crew chart to enable the driver chart to be fitted

Fit crew chart


under chart
table plate

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 412
The 1324 Tachograph – Chart Fitting – Driver

ƒ With the face of the driver chart uppermost, insert chart such that its edge
locates under the location sensor at the rear of the chart table, as shown.
Carefully locate the chart over the pear-shaped drive spindle such that the
thin end of the pear-shaped hole in the centre of the chart is located first

Fit driver chart


under location
sensor

ƒ After the charts are inserted, close the drawer by pushing it forward
until it is mechanically latched
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 413

The 1324 Tachograph – Bench Test Connections

ƒ The connections for a 1324 Bench Test are shown. The Power supply
powers the Tachograph at its Rear ‘A’ socket via an ignition switch box.
The MKII programmer is used to generate the Tachographs Bench Test
speed signals and is connected to the Tachograph Rear ‘B’ socket via a
MKII ‘Cable C’ Tachograph Drive lead

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 414
Using the MKII with 1324 – Bench Test

ƒ Before performing a Bench Test it must be ensured that the UK Bench Test is
selected via the MKII Diagnostics menu. It is recommended that prior to
Bench Testing a Clock Test is performed on the Tachograph
From the MAIN MENU select BENCH TEST KZ1324 MAIN MENU
using the ← and → keys, and press ENTER. :BENCH TEST

Select the Tachograph scale (125, 140, 180, Select the scale
100 or 160 km/h) using the ← and → keys, : 125 km/h ← →
and press ENTER.

Set the Programmer K-factor to 8000 (press Select K-factor


‘DELETE’ to change). Press ENTER. :8000 Pul/km?

Set to ‘Off’ to enable the Driver Duty ‘manual Auto Duty


change’ function and Press ENTER to accept. : Off ← →
This parameter must be set OFF when using
a Tachograph Rear ‘B’ socket drive cable ‘C’.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 415

Using the MKII with 1324 – Bench Test

Check Tachograph ‘W-factor’ and ‘K-factor’ Check tacho


(Read Only) are set to 8000 using ‘READ / settings
MODIFY DATA’ functions.

Check the Tachograph drive cable connection is Connect drive


made to rear socket ‘B’. lead to tacho

Set power supply voltage to the correct level for Switch on at


the Tachograph (12V or 24V). correct voltage

Make sure the clock colon is flashing. Note: if Check clock is


hours/minutes flashing do not continue as the Stepping OK
chart position is not correct for the current time
Make sure the 1324 LCD backlight is illuminated Check bulbs are
with ignition ON and dull with the ignition OFF. illuminated

The clock time should be adjusted if necessary. Check clock for


accuracy

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 416
Using the MKII with 1324 – Bench Test

Perform the task displayed. Press ENTER on Prepare and


completion. insert 2 charts
Note: For dual driver Tachographs, 2
charts must be inserted. For a single
driver, only 1 chart has to be inserted.
Perform the task displayed. Press ENTER on Close the
completion. tachograph

Set the driver and crew duty to active (4). Driver=Active


Press ENTER on completion. Crew=Active

The speed will now be maximum speed for the Speed: 125 km/h
selected scale for 10 seconds and the time will Time: 10 s
count down to zero and then an audible beep
will be heard.

The speed displayed will then go to 0 km/h for Speed: 0 km/h


10 seconds (the time will count down to zero) Time: 10 s
and an audible beep will be heard again.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 417

Using the MKII with 1324 – Bench Test

Make sure ‘Full Scale’ speed marking on chart is Check clock


within 5 minutes of the Tachograph time. to chart time

Perform the task displayed. Press ENTER on Close the


completion. tachograph

Note the current odometer reading on the Note odometer


Tachograph. This will be required later to check reading
the accuracy of the odometer. Press ENTER.

The speed will now go to 40 km/h and will be Speed: 40 km/h


held for 2½ minutes (the time will count down Time: 150 s
to zero). At the end of the 2½ minute test
there will be an audible beep.

The speed will then go up to 80 km/h. After a Speed: 80 km/h


further 2½ minutes (the time will count down to Time: 150 s
zero) there will again be an audible beep
indicating the end of that test.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 418
Using the MKII with 1324 – Bench Test

The speed will move up to 100 km/h for a Speed: 100 km/h
further 3 minutes (the time will count down to Time: 180 s
zero). At the end of the time there will be a
further beep and the speed will return to zero.

Set the driver and crew duty to active (4). Driver=Active


Press ENTER on completion. Crew=Active

The unit will record Active (4) duty for 2 Recording duty
minutes (the time will count down to zero). Time: 120 s
After that time an audible beep will be heard.

Set the driver and crew duty to passive (1). Driver=Passive


Press ENTER on completion. Crew=Passive

The unit will record Passive (1) duty for 2 Recording duty
minutes (the time will count down to zero). Time: 120 s
After that time an audible beep will be heard.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 419

Using the MKII with 1324 – Bench Test

Set the driver and crew duty to rest (2). Press Driver=Rest
ENTER on completion. Crew=Rest

The unit will record Rest (2) duty for 2 minutes Recording duty
(the time will count down to zero). After that Time: 120 s
time an audible beep will be heard.

Compare the new odometer reading with that Check odometer


noted above - a difference of 10 km is added 10 km
expected. Press ENTER on completion.

ƒ Note: carry out ‘sender disconnect’ and ‘power interrupt’ tests to


complete the bench test

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 420
Using the MKII with 1324 – Bench Test

Remove the two charts and check the traces Check chart
recorded (speed, duty and distance on driver recordings
chart and duty only on crew chart). Press
ENTER on completion.

The W-factor and K-factor (Read Only) must be Set K-exact


returned to the correct settings for the vehicle for vehicle
in which the Tachograph is to be fitted. Press
ENTER on completion.

Switch off the power to the Tachograph and SWITCH OFF


disconnect the power cable. POWER SUPPLY

Press the ENTER key to complete the test and KZ1324 MAIN MENU
return to the MAIN MENU. :BENCH TEST

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 421

The 1324 Tachograph – Checking the Bench Test Recordings

ƒ Once the Tachograph Bench Test is completed, the drawer can be


ejected again to check that the chart markings are satisfactory as shown

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 422
Section 3.5

Calibration Exercises at Approved


Tachograph Centre

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 423

Calibration Exercises at Approved Tachograph Centre –


Physical Method – 20 m Track

1. Use the physical method to determine the L-factor of the vehicle under
test. Hint: chalk tyre and ground then rotate drive wheel for 5
revolutions

2. Use the physical method to determine the W-factor of the vehicle under
test. Hint: use a MKII Programmer and flexi switch running the
Fixed#2 method as described previously

A B
20 metre track

Flexi-Switch End-of-track Markers

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 424
Calibration Exercises at Approved Tachograph Centre –
Rolling-road Method

1. Use the Rolling-road method to determine the W-factor of the vehicle


under test. Hint: use MKII programmer Rolling-road function as
described previously

2. Use the Rolling-road method to determine the L-factor of the vehicle


under test. Hint: use reflective patch/rolling-road light beam method

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 425

Calibration Exercises at Approved Tachograph Centre –


Health & Safety Issues

1. 20m Track: In a working commercial vehicle garage there are vehicle


movements all the time, thus,
• Yellow safety Jackets MUST be worn at all times
• Safety Cones MUST be used to mark the 20m track – use flashing
lamps at extremities

2. Rolling-road:
• Vehicles under test generally will be reversed onto a rolling road
• The driver must be able to see the rolling-road console at all times
• Do not stand in front of or behind any vehicle on the premises
• Chocks must be placed in front of a vehicle’s ‘non-drive’ wheels
• If a 4-wheel drive vehicle’s wheels have to be jacked-up, axle
stands MUST be used
• Roller brakes MUST NEVER be activated during a vehicle test
• The rolling road MUST not be used at speeds of greater
than 63 km/h
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 426
Section 3.6

VOSA Analogue Tachograph


Installation/6-Yearly Inspection
Procedure

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 427

Tachograph Regulations – Installation / 6-Yearly Periodic


Inspection Procedure

ƒ The full procedure is described in the VOSA Approved Tachograph Centre


Manual – please consult for the full current up-to-date procedure

ƒ Prior to carrying out the procedure, any previously fitted charts must be
removed and returned to the driver. The procedure is as follows:

• For a mechanical installation, any adaptor gearboxes must be stripped,


cleaned and re-greased before continuing

• Check Legal Requirements for installation


– Manufacturers Data Label / EU type approval number
– Check all Tachograph manufacturer seals are valid and intact
– For vehicles registered on or after 01/01/1996, check Tachograph
can automatically record driving. Check Tachograph-vehicle
motion sensor connection is made with armoured cable that is
sealed at both ends – not required if a signal encryption
type motion sensor is fitted
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 428
Tachograph Regulations – Installation / 6-Yearly Periodic
Inspection Procedure

• Bench Test the Tachograph with the Tachograph removed from the
vehicle using an approved method and equipment
– Check all displayed and recorded speeds and distances are within
the legal tolerances listed previously
– Check all non-driving duty modes are displayed and recorded
correctly
– Check clock for accuracy to within legal tolerances
– For vehicles registered on or after 01/01/1996 check that power-
failure and sender disconnect conditions are detected and
recorded

• Calibrate the Vehicle


– Measure the characteristic coefficient of the vehicle (W-Factor in
imp/km or rev/km)
– Measure the effective circumference of the drive wheel tyres
(L-Factor in mm)
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 429

Tachograph Regulations – Installation / 6-Yearly Periodic


Inspection Procedure

• Set the Tachograph Constant (K) using an approved programming


device or by adjusting DIL switches as appropriate

• Carry out a speed-for-speed check on the rolling road at a 50 km/h


test speed

• Seal the Tachograph Installation as per authority instructions

• Remove all existing plaques and fit a new installation plaque

• Complete documentation – GV 212 and Tachograph Record Sheet

• Retain Tachograph Test Charts and Tachograph Record sheet for 6


years

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 430
Section 3.7

VOSA Analogue Tachograph


2-Yearly Inspection Procedure

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 431

Tachograph Regulations – 2-Yearly Periodic Inspection


Procedure

ƒ The full procedure is described in the VOSA Approved Tachograph Centre


Manual – please consult for the full current up-to-date procedure

ƒ A 2-yearly inspection is due 2 years after the most recent calibration was
carried out or 2 years since the last 2-yearly inspection was carried out
unless a 6-yearly inspection is due. Note: a 6-yearly inspection must
NEVER be delayed

ƒ Prior to carrying out the procedure, any previously fitted charts must be
removed and returned to the driver. The procedure is as follows:

• Check Legal Requirements for installation


– EU type approval number / Tachograph descriptive plaque valid
– Check all Tachograph system seals are valid and intact

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 432
Tachograph Regulations – 2-Yearly Periodic Inspection
Procedure

• Test the Tachograph using an approved method and equipment


– Fit test charts
– Check clock for accuracy to within legal tolerances
– Check illumination
– Check chart to clock time ±5 minutes maximum
– Check all non-driving duty modes are recorded for 2 minutes and
displayed correctly
– For vehicles registered on or after 01/01/1996 check that power-
failure and sender disconnect conditions are detected & recorded
– Measure L-factor and check to within ±4% of L-factor recorded
previously on installation plaque
– Using roller test equipment drive at 40 km/h and then 60km/h for
2 minutes each – check displayed speeds are within tolerances
– Record odometer reading and distance travelled during test

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 433

Tachograph Regulations – 2-Yearly Periodic Inspection


Procedure

• Remove test charts and check all recorded speeds and distances are
within legal tolerances and duty mode traces are correct

• If installation meets all tolerances, remove all existing 2-yearly


plaques and fit a new 2-yearly plaque & seal – unless it is a type that
cannot be removed without destroying

• Complete documentation – GV 212 and Tachograph Record Sheet

• Retain Tachograph Test Charts and Tachograph Record sheet for a


minimum of 2 years

• If criteria not met, carry-out minor repair if possible e.g. external


electrical connections, odometer, front bezel to complete the
inspection

• If criteria not met and W and/or L out with VOSA tolerances, then a
6-yearly inspection including system recalibration must be
carried out
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 434
Any Questions?

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 435

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 436
Combined Analogue & Digital
Tachograph Course
Day 4

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 437

Day 4

ƒ 8:30 Exam Results, Questions from yesterday


ƒ 8:50 Introduction and Development of Digital Tachograph
ƒ 10:30 Tea Break
ƒ 10:45 Using the SE 5000
ƒ 13:00 Lunch
ƒ 13:30 Using the MKII programmer with the SE 5000
ƒ 15:00 Break
ƒ 15:15 CITO Download Tool Overview
ƒ 15:45 Using the CITO Download Tool
ƒ 16:45 Finish

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 438
Section 4.1

Digital Tachograph Presentation

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 439

Digital Tachograph Presentation

ƒ The Digital Tachograph System

ƒ Using the Vehicle Unit

ƒ Workshops and Digital Tachographs

ƒ Downloading of VU Stored Data

ƒ Workshop Requirements

ƒ Questions

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 440
Section 4.1.1

The Digital Tachograph System

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 441

Digital Tachograph System

Vehicle Unit

Motion Sensor
Cluster
Driver Smartcard

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 442
Description of the VU System

ƒ The Vehicle Unit


ƒ Radio sized unit containing
printer, display, user controls &
two smartcard slots
ƒ Information stored consists of
vehicle parameters, driver duties
(1 year typical), events & faults
information, speed (24 hours)
and distance information
ƒ Can supply signals to other
vehicle systems that require
speed or distance information

ƒ The Smartcard
ƒ A Driver smartcard is used when
a vehicle is being driven to store
driving data relating to the
named driver on the card
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 443

Description of the VU System

ƒ The Motion Sensor


ƒ Provides VU with speed signal pulses
from the vehicle gearbox
ƒ Speed signal is encrypted to ensure
integrity of signal, any tampering will
be detected and recorded
ƒ Paired with VU at installation to work as
a mutually inclusive pair

ƒ The Remote Display


ƒ Usually takes the form of an instrument
cluster
ƒ Used to display speed and distance,
using information passed from the VU

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 444
Other Digital VUs

ƒ Continental-VDO
1381 Vehicle Unit

ƒ Actia SmarTach
Vehicle Unit

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 445

1B System Overview & Interaction

Digital Tachograph Vehicle System

Vehicle Unit Motion Sensor


- Printer
- 2 SMC readers
- Data memory Driver Card
- Display
- Buttons
- DL interface Instrument
Cluster

Workshops Control
Companies
Authorities
Workshop Cards
Installation Company Cards
Control Cards Data Download
Calibration / Road checks
Equipment Data Analysis
Print outs Storage of vehicle
Inspection / Checks Data Download
Data Download & driver data
Data Analysis
Decommissioning VUs

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 446
Section 4.1.2

Using The Vehicle Unit

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 447

Description of Controls

Return Display Confirm Paper


Button Button Cassette

Driver Driver Duty- Crew Duty- Crew


Up Down Printer
Smartcard Change / Change / Smartcard
Button Button Paper Slot
Drawer Smartcard Smartcard Drawer
Eject Button Eject Button

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 448
User Control Buttons

ƒ Duty-Change / Eject Buttons


ƒ ‘1’ for Driver, ‘2’ for Crew
ƒ ‘short-press’ – duty change, ‘long-press’ - eject

ƒ Return Button
ƒ Is used for returning to the driver display screens and for
cancelling selections

ƒ Up/Down Buttons
ƒ Scroll through menu options or increment/decrement
displayed values

ƒ Confirm Button
ƒ Enter main menu, confirm selectable options, acknowledge
and clear warning messages

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 449

Universal Time Co-ordinated - UTC

ƒ ALL VUs operate using UTC as their master reference time – all driving
event times stored, displayed or printed are UTC times

ƒ UTC replaced GMT in 1986 as the world standard for time

ƒ UTC does not change due to seasonal adjustment i.e. no concept of


“Summer time”

ƒ Workshops MUST set VU master time to UTC

ƒ Local time is available to a VU user for display purposes only

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 450
Driving – Normal Operation

Insert Smartcard
in Drawer This includes entry of the start location

Manual Entries This is for duties carried out prior to the card insertion

Drive This includes setting the current duty and any out of
scope driving periods

Withdraw This includes entry of the end location


Smartcard

Note: The purpose of the manual entry of driver duties is to provide a driver
with the opportunity to store a record of any duties that have been carried out
since their smartcard was last withdrawn from a VU

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 451

Driving – Manual Entry of Duties

ƒ When a driver or workshop smartcard is inserted in a VU, if manual entries


are requested, i.e. ‘Rest until now?’=‘No’ then ‘Add manual entries?’=‘Yes’
selected,

ƒ Then a User has two options to continue in terms of manual entry input:

ƒ Firstly the manual entries are for a continuation of the current daily
work period and the user can manually input any duties carried out
from the ‘last card withdrawal’ to the ‘card insertion’ times

ƒ Secondly the manual entries are for a new daily work period and the
user can then manually input any duties carried out firstly from ‘last
card withdrawal’ up to ‘end of daily work period’ and secondly from
‘new daily start time’ to ‘card insertion time’

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 452
Standard Driving Display

ƒ Top line relates to driver and shows from left side; current activity and
duration, cumulative break time, and VU mode of operation

ƒ Bottom line relates to crew and shows from left side; current activity and
duration, and the current local offset time in 24-hour format

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 453

Printouts

ƒ Drivers must take printouts if


ƒ Their driver smartcard is lost, stolen or faulty -
take printout at the start and finish of driving
ƒ They are mixing driving in vehicles fitted with
Digital Tachographs and paper chart based units

ƒ Printouts must be stored along with any paper charts


and be readily available for any enforcement checks

ƒ Printouts must be taken on approved paper – the


rear of the paper has approval number E5 0002
shown for SE5000

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 454
Printouts

ƒ There are 6 legally required types of VU printout available


ƒ Daily driver activities from card

ƒ Daily driver activities from VU

ƒ Warnings from card - events and faults

ƒ Warnings from VU - events and faults

ƒ Technical data

ƒ Overspeed data

ƒ Note: Additional non-legal printouts are available to show ‘Local-time’


versions of Daily Driver Activity for a card or a VU, and where applicable,
occurrences of D1/D2 events, vehicle engine speed bands and vehicle
speed bands

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 455

VU Warnings - Events & Faults

ƒ A VU can detect a number of different types of Events and Faults conditions

ƒ The VU will warn a user of a detected event or fault condition by displaying


an appropriate warning message

ƒ Messages can be acknowledged and cleared by pressing the ‘Confirm’


button

ƒ A printout of any Events and Faults stored in a VU or on a smartcard can be


obtained as required

ƒ There are 6 types of VU Warning Message, as described below

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 456
VU Warnings - Events & Faults

ƒ There are 6 types of VU Warning message:

ƒ General events

ƒ VU related security breach attempt events

ƒ Sensor related security breach attempt events

ƒ Recording equipment faults

ƒ Card faults

ƒ Manufacturer specific events and faults

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 457

Section 4.1.3

Workshops and Digital Tachographs

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 458
Workshop Approval

ƒ All workshops must have VOSA approval before they can work on Digital
Tachograph systems

ƒ Workshop Technicians must be holders of valid in-date analogue and digital


certificates or a combined certificate before they can work on Digital
Tachograph systems. In the UK, renewal certificates must be faxed to
VOSA. See VOSA ATC manual for further details

ƒ To complete certification a workshop Technician must work at a VOSA


approved Tachograph Centre

ƒ Workshops must have a Designated Manager responsible for Tachographs.


In their absence, a deputy must fill this role

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 459

Workshop Approval

ƒ VOSA approved equipment must be used for all Digital Tachograph work

ƒ Workshops must operate as a secure environment

ƒ Workshops must ensure that all workshop cards are properly used and
securely stored when not in use

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 460
Workshop VU Functions

ƒ Workshops will be required to interact with VU systems in a number of


ways

ƒ Full Installation of Digital Tachograph Systems

ƒ Inspection of Digital Tachograph systems

ƒ Decommissioning and Repair of VU systems

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 461

Pre-Installation of a Digital Tachograph System

ƒ It is essential that prior to fitment of an SE5000


VU the following items are checked

ƒ The VU data label must show the correct


Stoneridge VU type approval number, i.e. E5
0002

ƒ The tamper label must be intact

ƒ The Stoneridge hologram must be correct

ƒ The VU should have no evidence of physical


damage or tampering

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 462
Installation of a Digital Tachograph System

ƒ Fitting the gearbox motion sensor and the sensor cable

ƒ Making required power and signal connections

ƒ Mounting the VU

ƒ Pairing the VU and motion sensor. This will automatically occur as part of
the activation process – all VUs will always auto-pair

ƒ Activating the VU, verify the activation symbol, , disappears

ƒ Calibration and programming of the VU system

ƒ Sealing the VU system

ƒ Completion and fitment of a VU installation plaque. Complete paperwork


and update GV212. GV212 must be in VOSA accepted electronic format
from 1st January 2010
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 463

Activating the VU for Use

ƒ A VU is delivered non-activated

ƒ Access to Calibration functions is granted while non-activated, even when


not in Calibration Mode

ƒ Must activate VU after installation before vehicle leaves the premises

ƒ Activation occurs automatically on first insertion of a valid PIN authenticated


workshop card

ƒ After activation, VU is fully operational including recording functions

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 464
Calibration and Programming

ƒ A Workshop smartcard is required to program calibration parameters into a


VU

ƒ Programming should be carried out using a VOSA approved device such as


the Stoneridge MKII Digital Tachograph Programmer

ƒ Determination of the vehicle calibration parameters is done using an


approved method

ƒ Program all calibration parameters into the VU

ƒ 1st calibration of the VU system must be within 2 weeks of installation or


VRN allocation

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 465

MKII Tachograph Programmer

ƒ New updated version of software for Digital


Tachographs

ƒ Supports analogue and Digital Tachograph types

ƒ All existing MKII Tachograph Programmers are


software upgradeable

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 466
Calibration Records – Digital Tachograph, VU

ƒ After programming a VU with new calibration parameters, a calibration


record is generated and stored in the VU. The record includes,
ƒ The calibration purpose
ƒ Workshop details
ƒ VIN & VRN
ƒ The W, K & L factors
ƒ The tyre size
ƒ Speed limiter setting, if appropriate
ƒ The odometer value
ƒ The UTC time
ƒ Due date of next calibration
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 467

Calibration Records – Workshop Card

ƒ A similar calibration record is also generated and stored on Workshop cards


that are used to perform calibrations. This record includes,
ƒ A count of all calibrations performed with the card
ƒ The calibration purpose
ƒ VIN & VRN
ƒ The W, K & L factors
ƒ The tyre size & speed limiter setting
ƒ The odometer value
ƒ The UTC time
ƒ Due date of next calibration
ƒ VU & motion sensor serial number and VU part number
ƒ A count of the number of calibrations performed since the workshop
card stored calibration records were last downloaded
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 468
Sealing the VU System

ƒ Sealing the motion sensor to the gearbox is a necessity – an approved


method must be used
Notes: 1. plastic gearbox sender sealing shrouds that are fitted by some
vehicle manufacturers are not VOSA approved and are to be replaced by
sealing wire and a soft-metal seal embossed with the workshop
identification number
2. the gearbox seal identification number must always match the centre
details shown on the Tachograph installation plaque
ƒ Any VU system presented with a broken seal must be re-sealed and re-
calibrated but a report must also be prepared and made available to the
relevant authorities as to why the seal was broken
ƒ The VU installation plaque must be sealed unless it is of a type that cannot
be removed without damaging it
ƒ All sealing of Digital Tachograph systems must be done by an approved
Digital Tachograph workshop technician

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 469

Sealing the VU System – SE5000 Rear Shroud

ƒ If an output speed related signal is being used, i.e. B7, then an SE5000 Rear
sealing shroud must be fitted as shown,

ƒ Stoneridge SE5000 Rear Shroud


– kit part number is 7800-006

ƒ Stoneridge SE5000 Rear Shroud


– Fitted and Sealed with
Embossed Red Seal

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 470
Installation Plaque

ƒ The final part of the Digital Tachograph installation procedure is the


generation and fitment of an installation plaque. Note: the installation
plaque must be generated automatically

ƒ Installation Plaque must be fitted on or beside the VU and must be visible at


all times. The plaque is valid for 2 years

ƒ After each inspection a new plaque must be fitted in place of the previous
one

ƒ Information on the plaque must include


ƒ Name and address of approved technician or
workshop
ƒ W, K and L factors
ƒ Tyre size
ƒ VIN
ƒ Date of W & L factor determination
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 471

Workshop Inspections – Reasons for Inspection

ƒ After any repair of the equipment. Replacement of the paper cassette does
not constitute a repair of a VU

ƒ If the motion sensor seal is broken

ƒ After any alteration to the W or L factors

ƒ If the VU UTC clock time is inaccurate by more than 20 minutes

ƒ When it has been 2 years since the last inspection

ƒ If the VRN has changed

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 472
Workshop Inspections – Inspection Procedure

ƒ A visual inspection must be carried out to ensure that the


unit has not been tampered with and no security breach
attempts have been made. In cases of tampering see VOSA
warning notice GV215 for further advice

ƒ The VU manufacturers’ label and type approval mark must


be checked, i.e. E5 0002

ƒ Check all system seals are intact

ƒ Bench Test the Digital Tachograph

ƒ The tyre size and actual circumference of the drive wheels


must be checked

ƒ The presence and content of the current installation plaque


must be checked – record any anomalies on the Inspection
report
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 473

Workshop Inspections – Inspection Procedure

ƒ Check that the recording equipment functions correctly, including data


storage on smartcards

ƒ Check the integrity of the Motion Sensor/VU connection using an


independent cable connected directly from the sensor to the VU

ƒ Confirm that the unit operates to within maximum tolerances for both
speed and distance and check that its UTC time is set correctly

ƒ A mandatory vehicle re-calibration must be carried out. Program the new


VU calibration parameters and also the ‘Next Calibration Date’ to 2 years
on. Check all other VU programmable parameters are set correctly

ƒ A new installation plaque must be fitted after the inspection is completed


and an inspection report/calibration certificate must be issued to the
vehicle owner to confirm the inspection completion. Update the GV212 –
2009 VOSA manual indicates that this must be in a VOSA accepted
electronic format from 1/1/2010
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 474
Workshop Inspection Procedure – 1381 Extra Requirements

ƒ The VDO 1381 Digital Tachograph has a 3.6V, ½-AA Lithium back-up
battery that MUST be replaced every two years maximum, usually as part
of the Digital Inspection. The back-up battery must first be exposed by
breaking the red seal on the battery compartment rear cover as shown
ƒ The Tachograph MUST be powered through it’s rear ‘A’ socket as shown
before the back-up battery is disconnected and replaced. Failure to do
this will result in the Tachograph losing its internal memory settings and
will cause the Tachograph to permanently malfunction

Remove seal, open 1381 MUST remain Connect Fit battery in


compartment and powered whilst replacement compartment, close
expose back-up disconnecting battery battery and re-seal to
battery secure battery
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 475

Workshop Inspection Procedure – 1381 Extra Requirements

ƒ The VDO 1381 has a type approval/security label inside its printer paper
compartment. It must be ensured that the label is present and completely
intact as part of a Digital Inspection procedure

ƒ It must also be ensured that the 1381 front security red-seal is intact and
has not been tampered with or replaced, i.e. must be original VDO seal

ƒ If the 1381 Ignition Key On/Off parameter settings are updated solely, this
change does not require a full VU inspection/calibration. However, as
indicated in the 2009 VOSA manual ‘Minor Work to a Digital Tachograph’
section, the GV212 must be updated with a manual entry marked ‘Minor
Work’, although Minor Work plaque fitment is NOT required

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 476
Workshop Inspection Procedure – SmarTach Extra
Requirements

ƒ It must be ensured that the SmarTach type approval label is present and
completely intact on the side of the unit as part of a Digital Inspection
procedure

ƒ It must also be ensured that the three metallic strip seals, as seen from
above the VU, and front-panel side red-strip seals are all present and intact

Red Strip Metallic Type approval label


Seal Strip Seal
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 477

Workshop Inspections - Bench Test

ƒ Take technical printout from VU whilst it is fitted in the vehicle

ƒ Remove VU from the vehicle

ƒ Visually check the following items


ƒ Installation plaque
ƒ Type approval label
ƒ Tamperproof label
ƒ Sealing of the VU

ƒ Insert a Workshop card into slots 1 & 2 verifying they can be authenticated
in each drawer by entering the PIN code through the keys on the VU front
panel

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 478
Workshop Inspections - Bench Test

ƒ Perform a 1000m test using the MKII programmer, using a test speed of
50km/h
ƒ Verify the VU odometer is accurate to 1%
ƒ Confirm the speed displayed on the VU is accurate to 1km/h

ƒ Verify that each duty can be selected by the duty buttons on the VU,
checking that the appropriate symbol is displayed on the VU

ƒ Perform a speed test using the MKII programmer, checking the three
speeds 40, 80 and 180km/h are all displayed on the VU to an accuracy
of 1km/h

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 479

Workshop Inspections – Inspection Report

ƒ After each Workshop inspection an


inspection report should be issued to the
owner of the VU

ƒ Information on the inspection report will


typically include,
ƒ The VU owner
ƒ The VU manufacturer
ƒ The VU model and serial number
ƒ The VIN and VRN
ƒ The result of the inspection
ƒ The date of the certificate issue

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 480
Repair and Decommissioning of Vehicle Units

ƒ Due to the security requirements of Digital Tachograph systems there


are no repairable parts in a Stoneridge VU

ƒ A VU case must never be opened as this would be a breach of Digital


Tachograph security, making the VU invalid

ƒ Replacement of the paper cassette is permitted – this is NOT classed


as a repair

ƒ Faulty VUs must be decommissioned using the method described as


follows –

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 481

Decommissioning Procedure

ƒ Remove the VU from the vehicle

ƒ Download the VU data memory contents

ƒ The downloaded data must be securely stored for at least 1 year

ƒ The workshop must inform the current vehicle owner in writing that they
are holding data that belongs to the owner

ƒ After a written request, a copy of any Company-locked decommissioned


data can be exported to the data owner. Note: keep a copy of the written
customer request

ƒ If download is not possible, a certificate must be issued and a copy of the


certificate must be kept for 1 year

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 482
Opening Smartcard Drawers Without Power

Crew Driver
Drawer Drawer
Breakout Breakout
Slot Slot

Drawer VU
Latched Display
Open

Note: This method is normally applicable to Workshops only and must NEVER
be used by a driver. Controllers/vehicle owners should only use this method if
a Tachograph Workshop is not available to retrieve a trapped card

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 483

Section 4.1.4

M1N1 Adaptor

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 484
M1N1 Adaptor – Legislation Requirements

ƒ M1 and N1 vehicles are defined in the Framework Directive 70/156/EEC as


follows:

• Category M1: a Vehicle that is used for the carriage of passengers and
that comprises no more than eight seats in addition to the driver

• Category N1: a Vehicle that is used for the carriage of goods and that
has a maximum permissible weight not exceeding 3.5 metric tonnes

ƒ If an M1 or N1 vehicle has a trailer or semi-trailer attached such that it


exceeds 3.5 tonnes, then the vehicle is subject to Tachograph legislation,
as long as the vehicle is being used commercially

ƒ Due to the design of certain M1 and N1 vehicles, their gearboxes cannot be


fitted with a standard Kitas2 sensor. The solution for these vehicles is to fit
an M1N1 Adaptor

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 485

M1N1 Adaptor – Legislation Requirements

ƒ The M1N1 Adaptor legislation, Commission Regulation (EC) No 68/2009,


came into force on 24th July 2009
ƒ A Type Approved adaptor can only be installed in M1 or N1 class vehicles
registered between 1st May 2006 and 31st December 2013 inclusive, where
it is not mechanically possible to install any other type of existing approved
motion sensor. The adaptor must always be fitted between the Digital VU
and part of the vehicle where the speed/distance pulses are generated
ƒ If a VOSA approved mechanical solution, either with or without a Mechanical
adaptor exists for a specific vehicle, then an M1N1 Adaptor must not
be used in the vehicle
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 486
M1N1 Adaptor – Installation Requirements

ƒ M1N1 adaptor installations must only be performed by approved workshops.


Stoneridge Workshop Technical Support have M1N1 application sheets that
provide full information on where to fit adaptor and the connections to make

ƒ The adaptor must be securely sealed so that it cannot be opened without


obvious tampering. If damaged, the M1N1 adaptor must not be used

ƒ The connections from the adaptor to the vehicle are positive supply (red),
negative supply (black) and speed/distance pulse source (yellow)

ƒ The Adaptor must be mounted and secured to the vehicle chassis, or to


another part of the vehicle that cannot be removed. The position of the
adaptor should be as close as possible to the part of the vehicle providing
the incoming speed/distance pulses

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 487

M1N1 Adaptor – Installation Requirements

ƒ The Adaptor to the chassis and to


the external connections must be
secured using sealing wire and
embossed seals in a similar way Information to
to that shown. A Product plaque be added at
installation
must be fitted and the installation stage
date and vehicle VIN should be
manually added as highlighted,
and then sealed

ƒ If the vehicle W-factor is >8000


or <250, a re-calibration must
be carried out with an M1N1
Connect adaptor
Adaptor programmer connected. programmer to
The MKII will automatically Adaptor and MKII

reprogram the adaptor internal


ratio to an appropriate value for
the W-factor determined
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 488
M1N1 Adaptor – Installation Requirements

ƒ Once the installation is complete, a new style M1N1 adaptor installation


plaque must be fitted to the vehicle

ƒ The plaque must contain additional information to a standard Installation


Plaque as follows,
• Part of the vehicle where the M1N1 Adaptor is installed
• Colour of cable between adaptor and part of vehicle providing impulses
• Serial number of the embedded motion sensor of the Adaptor

ƒ Finally, the VOSA official record of Tachograph plaques issued, GV212, must
be updated with the plaque details. The entry must be annotated with
“ADAPTOR” to indicate an M1N1 adaptor has been fitted

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 489

M1N1 Adaptor – Periodic Inspection Requirements

ƒ During the periodic inspection of a Digital Tachograph system, if an M1N1


adaptor is fitted, then as part of the inspection procedure it must be
confirmed that the,

• Adaptor carries the appropriate type approval marking, i.e. e11 0042

• Seals on the adaptor and its connections are intact

• Adaptor installation location is as indicated on the installation plaque

• Adaptor is installed as specified by the adaptor manufacturer

• Use of adaptor is authorised for the inspected vehicle type

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 490
Section 4.1.5

Downloading of VU Stored Data

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 491

Data Downloading

ƒ Downloading is the copying of a partial or a complete set of data that is


stored in VU memory or on a smartcard

ƒ All VU downloading when decommissioning must be done when the vehicle


is stationary or the VU is removed from the vehicle

ƒ Workshops

ƒ Must download the memory contents with the VU in the calibration


mode, when decommissioning “failed” VUs

ƒ Must read Workshop Card calibration records

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 492
Data Download Process

ƒ Download MUST be carried out using VOSA approved equipment that is


compliant with the protocol as laid out in the legislative document
1360/2002 Annex 7

ƒ The Stoneridge Workshop Download tool, CITO, meets this requirement

ƒ The actual download process is controlled by the download tool, with the
VU automatically responding to download requests from the download
tool, assuming the vehicle is not moving or the VU is removed from the
vehicle

ƒ Downloading can be very easily achieved using the ‘Quick VU Download’


and ‘Quick Smartcard Download’ Buttons on the CITO Download tool

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 493

Workshop Download Tool - CITO

ƒ Sufficient Memory space for 20 full VU data


downloads

ƒ Data download from VU via RS232 communications


interface, front 6-way connector

ƒ Data upload to PC via USB interface

ƒ PC CITO Software for legal data storage, printing


reports and exporting data to owners

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 494
Section 4.1.6

Workshop Requirements

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 495

Workshop Requirements

ƒ New style of GV212 form

ƒ Must declare Digital or Analogue


tachograph type

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 496
Workshop Requirements

ƒ Workshops must comply with all aspects of the VOSA ‘Approved Tachograph
Centre Manual’. All newly qualified Technicians must read the manual as a
VOSA legal requirement. Technicians breaking any rules will be subject to
VOSA disciplinary procedures as described in the manual

ƒ Downloaded data must be kept safe and secure, preferably using a firesafe
or off-site security storage system. This data must be encrypted or password
protected

ƒ Workshops must have a Designated Manager

ƒ Workshop cards must be kept in a secure facility within the workshop. This
will be a safe secured in the Workshop floor. VOSA manual describes the
rules which apply

ƒ Improper use of a Workshop card is fully traceable

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 497

Useful Websites & E-mail Contacts

ƒ For the Digital Tachograph

ƒ Government Bodies
• VOSA: www.vosa.gov.uk,
e-mail: tachosection@vosa.gov.uk
• UTC: wwp.greenwichmeantime.com/info/utc.htm

ƒ Trade Associations
• FTA: www.fta.co.uk
• RHA: www.rha.net

ƒ Manufacturer
• Stoneridge Electronics:
www.stoneridgeelectronics.info
www.SE5000.com
e-mail: workshop.support@stoneridge.com
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 498
Any Questions?

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 499

Section 4.2

Digital Tachograph VU Functions

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 500
Digital Tachograph VU Functions

ƒ VU Menu Navigation

ƒ VU Printer Paper Replacement

ƒ Inserting And Removing Smartcards

ƒ Adjusting The VU Settings

ƒ VU Normal Driving Operation

ƒ VU Printouts

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 501

Section 4.2.1

VU Menu Navigation

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 502
Description of Controls

Return Display Confirm Paper


Button Button Cassette

Driver Driver Duty- Crew Duty- Crew


Up Down Printer
Smartcard Change / Change / Smartcard
Button Button Paper Slot
Drawer Smartcard Smartcard Drawer
Eject Button Eject Button

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 503

VU Menu Navigation – Practical Exercise

ƒ Learn to navigate through the various VU menu and sub-menu options – use
the Workshop training manual Digital Section to determine the function of
each menu item

ƒ Remember - Use the ‘Confirm’ button to move down a menu level and use the
‘Return’ button to get back to the previous menu level screen

ƒ Note: Repeated pressing of the ‘Return’ button will always return the VU to
the ‘Standard Driving Display Screen’

ƒ The following ‘Menu-Navigation’ diagram should help to complete the


exercise:-
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 504
VU Menu Navigation – Driver Display Screens

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 505

VU Menu Navigation – SE5000 Menu

ƒ Press ‘Confirm’ button to enter the Tachograph Menu and again to


enter one of the sub-menu’s shown

ƒ Press the ‘Return’ button to leave the Tachograph Menu and return to
the Driver display screens

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 506
VU Display Symbols

VU Display Symbols – Annex 1B


 Operational/Drive  Company  Control  Card
 Calibration/Workshop  Display  Printer  Download
 End of daily work  Sensor  Power  Vehicle/VU
 Start of daily work ! Event  Fault  Clock/Time
OUT Out of Scope  Location  From/To  Activation
 Ferry 24h Daily  Two Weeks  Tyre Size

VU Display Symbols – Stoneridge Electronics


 Settings  Busy  Speed  Invert
 Lock/Key  Enter  Case opened  Paper
 High  Low  High/Low  Temperature

New Symbols SE5000 Rev7 – Stoneridge Electronics


Print Places Settings

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 507

Section 4.2.2

VU Printer Paper Replacement

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 508
VU Printer Paper Replacement – Practical Exercise

ƒ Change the VU Printer Paper. The Stages in the replacement of the VU


Printer Paper are as follows:-

ƒ Remove the Paper Cassette from the VU housing

ƒ Insert the paper roll into the Paper Cassette bucket ensuring that the
paper orientation is correct

ƒ Carefully re-insert the Paper Cassette into the VU housing, gently


pushing on the bottom lip of the cassette until it latches fully into the
VU cassette housing

ƒ The following ‘Printer Paper’ diagrams should help to complete the


exercise:-

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 509

VU Printer Paper Replacement – Paper Cassette Removal

1. Gently press the fascia in the middle near the top of the VU. 2. This will result in the fascia tilting outwards at the bottom.

3. Hold the fascia at the bottom where it is tilting outwards. 4. Gently pull the fascia/mechanism forward out of the VU.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 510
VU Printer Paper Replacement – Printer Paper Orientation

Insert paper roll in removed cassette and then carefully re-


insert paper cassette in VU

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 511

Section 4.2.3

Inserting And Removing Smartcards

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 512
Inserting and Removing Smartcards – Practical Exercise

ƒ Learn how to insert and remove smartcards from a VU

ƒ Eject required smartcard drawer – long-press smartcard eject button - ‘1’


for Driver or ‘2’ for Crew

ƒ Complete ‘Card Withdrawal’ Procedure – required only if a Driver or a


Workshop card is currently inserted in the VU

ƒ Insert smartcard in ejected drawer – “ Ejecting card”, ‘’ for crew,


will be displayed for a short period before the drawer opens

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 513

Inserting a Smartcard

ƒ Insert the smartcard, with the card orientation as shown,


ƒ Close smartcard drawer – after a short delay, name of card holder and last
card withdrawal details will be briefly shown, followed in turn by “Rest
Until Now?”, “Entries printout?” and “Confirm entries?” screens.
Select each option as shown and the card will be accepted by the VU. If
card insertion is first for new day, select “Begin Country” as ‘United Kingdom’

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 514
Ejecting a Smartcard

ƒ Long-press the smartcard eject button - ‘1’ for Driver or ‘2’ for Crew
ƒ Enter “End country” as ‘United Kingdom’ – required for Driver or Workshop
card only
ƒ “Ejecting card”, is displayed to indicate smartcard ejection sequence
is under way
ƒ Remove card from drawer as shown

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 515

Section 4.2.4

Adjusting The VU Settings

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 516
Adjusting The VU Settings – Settings Menu Options

ƒ Preferred Language Selection

ƒ Local time adjustment - up to ±12Hours from UTC in 30 minute offsets

ƒ Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) adjustment

ƒ Invert the display - i.e. light becomes dark, dark becomes light

ƒ Execute built-in tests - to check functionality of VU parts

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 517

Adjusting The VU Settings – Practical Exercises

ƒ Use settings menu to invert the VU display for ‘night-time’ driving. Change
back to the original normal setting (i.e. select ‘NO’ option)

ƒ Check VU UTC time via the settings menu. UTC can only be adjusted by
±1 minute every 7 days in operational mode via the VU keypad

ƒ Larger UTC adjustments can only be made in the calibration mode of


operation, via the VU keypad or by using a Tachograph programmer

ƒ VU UTC adjustments of more than 20 minutes would require the VU to be


fully inspected and re-calibrated

ƒ Set the local time via settings menu - this may be adjusted in 30 minute
offsets up to ±12 Hours from the UTC master time

ƒ Use settings menu to select ‘English’ as the preferred language


© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 518
Adjusting The VU Settings – Practical Exercises

ƒ Execute the 5 VU Settings menu ‘Built-in’ tests, i.e.

ƒ Display test – test the VU display

ƒ Invert display test – test inversion of the VU display

ƒ Printer test – print a test printout

ƒ Keypad test – check the operation of the VU buttons

ƒ Smartcard test – check any smartcards inserted in a VU

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 519

Section 4.2.5

VU Normal Driving Operation

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 520
VU Normal Driving Operation – Overview

ƒ Insert Smartcard in Drawer – This includes entry of the start location

ƒ Manual Entries – This is for inputting duties prior to the card insertion

ƒ Drive – This includes setting the current duty and any out of scope driving
periods

ƒ Withdraw Smartcard – This includes entry of the end location

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 521

VU Normal Driving Operation – Practical Exercises

ƒ Introduction
ƒ These exercises are to be carried out in conjunction with the
Stoneridge Electronics Digital Tachograph Workshop Manual

ƒ Equipment Required
ƒ Stoneridge VU, Paper Roll, Power Supply, KITAS2 Motion Sensor &
Cable, VU Speed Simulator, Driver Smartcard

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 522
VU Normal Driving Operation – Practical Exercises

ƒ Method

ƒ Insert a Driver smartcard into slot 1 of the VU as described in Section


4.2.3 ‘Inserting and Removing Smartcards’

ƒ Bypass ‘manual entries’ option by selecting the option screens as shown

ƒ If card insertion is on a new day, select the “Begin country” as ‘United


Kingdom’

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 523

VU Normal Driving Operation – Practical Exercises

ƒ Method

ƒ Record the VU UTC time at card insertion. The VU UTC time can be
found on the ‘Date and Time’ alternative driving display. This will be
similar to the display shown below, i.e. press ‘up’ or ‘down’ buttons
when showing the ‘Standard’ driving display screen that was described
in Section 4.2.1 ‘VU Menu Navigation’

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 524
VU Normal Driving Operation – Practical Exercises

ƒ Method continued

ƒ Change the driver duty to available () and crew duty to rest () and
check the VU displayed duties on the ‘Standard’ driving display are as
shown below

ƒ Record the odometer reading and the VU UTC time. Wait for at least 2
minutes

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 525

VU Normal Driving Operation – Practical Exercises

ƒ Method continued
ƒ Start driving at 30km/h by adjusting the speed simulator control.
Record the exact time that the speed was changed from zero. Check
the VU displayed driver and crew duties on the ‘standard’ driving
display automatically change to drive () and available () respectively.
Check that the VU displayed speed is accurate to ±1km/h

ƒ After 4 minutes exactly change the speed to 60km/h, again by


adjusting the speed simulator control. Check again that the VU
displayed speed is accurate to ±1km/h and the VU displayed duties
remain at drive () and available ()
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 526
VU Normal Driving Operation – Practical Exercises

ƒ Method continued
ƒ After 2 minutes exactly change the speed to 90km/h, again by adjusting
the speed simulator control. Check again that the VU displayed speed is
accurate to ±1km/h and the VU displayed duties remain at drive () and
available ()

ƒ After 2 minutes exactly, change the speed back to 0km/h by adjusting


the speed simulator control. Check the VU displayed driver and crew
duties on the ‘standard’ driving display automatically change to work ()
and available () respectively. Check that the odometer has added
7.0km ± 0.14km (2%). Wait for at least 2 minutes

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 527

VU Normal Driving Operation – Practical Exercises

ƒ Method continued
ƒ Change the driver duty to rest (). Check the VU displayed driver
duty is now rest. Wait for at least 2 minutes

ƒ Select ‘Out of Scope’ driving mode via the ‘Places’ sub-menu. Start
driving at 20 km/h. Check ‘Out of Scope’ driving mode is selected on
the VU display. Wait at least 1 minute. Stop driving

ƒ Deselect the ‘Out of Scope’ driving mode to end the exercise

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 528
Section 4.2.6

VU Printouts

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 529

VU Printouts – Practical Exercise

ƒ Navigate through the various VU Printout options and learn the need for
each printout type, as listed on the next slide

ƒ Generate a “Daily Driver Activities From Card” printout from the driver
smartcard that was used previously in the “VU Normal Driving Operation”
practical exercise

ƒ Check the printout against the duties/times input during the previous “VU
Normal Driving Operation” Practical Exercise

ƒ For an explanation of the different sections on the printout a ”sample


printout” is included in the workshop training manual

ƒ Finish the exercises by ejecting the driver smartcard from the VU

ƒ When prompted by the VU, input the ‘End country’ as UK

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 530
VU Printouts – Types

ƒ There are 6 legally required types of VU printout available:

ƒ Daily driver activities from card

ƒ Daily driver activities from VU

ƒ Warnings from card - events and faults

ƒ Warnings from VU - events and faults

ƒ Technical data

ƒ Overspeed data

ƒ Note: Additional non-legal printouts are available to show ‘Local-time’


versions of Daily Driver Activity for a card or a VU, and where applicable,
occurrences of D1/D2 events, vehicle engine speed bands and vehicle
speed bands

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 531

Section 4.3

Using and Programming the VU

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 532
Using and Programming the VU

ƒ Interfacing a Stoneridge SE5000 VU to the Stoneridge MKII Tachograph


Programmer

ƒ Interaction Between the Stoneridge MKII Tachograph Programmer and


a Stoneridge VU

ƒ Modification of VU Stored Parameters Using a Stoneridge MKII


Tachograph Programmer

ƒ Bench testing a Stoneridge VU

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 533

Section 4.3.1

Interfacing a VU to the Stoneridge


MKII Tachograph Programmer

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 534
Interfacing a Stoneridge VU to the Stoneridge MKII
Tachograph Programmer

ƒ Interfacing of the MKII Tachograph Programmer to a Stoneridge VU is


done via the programmer 8-pin DIN connector and the VU 6-way front
calibration connector

ƒ Both connectors are keyed so that wrongly inserting them is not possible

ƒ The VU 6-way connector is exposed by first removing the paper cassette as


shown in the slides that follow

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 535

Interfacing a Stoneridge VU to the MKII Programmer –


Paper Cassette Removal

1. Gently press the fascia in the middle near the top of the VU. 2. This will result in the fascia tilting outwards at the bottom.

3. Hold the fascia at the bottom where it is tilting outwards. 4. Gently pull the fascia/mechanism forward out of the VU.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 536
Interfacing a Stoneridge VU to the MKII Programmer – VU
Calibration Connector

VU Front 6-Way Calibration Connector

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 537

Interfacing a VU to the MKII Programmer – Continental


VDO 1381 Calibration Connector

VU Front 6-Way Calibration Connector

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 538
Interfacing a VU to the MKII Programmer – Actia
SmarTach Calibration Connector

VU Front 6-Way Calibration Connector

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 539

Interfacing a Stoneridge VU to the MKII Programmer –


Programming Cable

Insert DIN Connector into MKII


Programmer 8-Way DIN Socket

Insert D-shaped 6-Way Connector into VU


6-Way Programming Socket

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 540
Section 4.3.2

Interaction Between the Stoneridge


MKII Tachograph Programmer and
the Stoneridge VU

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 541

Interaction Between the MKII Tachograph Programmer


and the Stoneridge VU

ƒ All interaction between the MKII Programmer and a Stoneridge VU is


controlled by the MKII Programmer

ƒ In the operational mode, the VU will only allow its internal parameters to be
read by an external device

ƒ In the calibration mode of operation, i.e. VU has an authenticated Workshop


card inserted, the VU will respond to bench test, speed simulator and
parameter re-programming signals

ƒ A Workshop card that is inserted into a VU can be PIN code authenticated


using the VU keypad. However an SE5000 can also be remotely
authenticated using a MKII Programmer. Note: for VDO and Actia VUs the
number of digits in the PIN code must be entered and accepted before the
PIN code itself

ƒ Always set the clock on the MKII Programmer to UTC time

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 542
Using MKII Programmer for Workshop card PIN
Authentication

ƒ Pin authentication by entering the PIN using the MKII Programmer can only
be used with an SE5000 VU

ƒ When a Workshop card is inserted in a VU, the VU will wait for the PIN code
entry to authenticate the Workshop card
Note: for an SE5000, if the wrong PIN is entered, the number of PIN code
authentication attempts left before the card will be locked is displayed – a
maximum of 5 consecutive wrong attempts are allowed. A ‘locked’ card
will be rejected by all VUs and then a replacement card must be
applied for any future Digital work

ƒ The MKII Tachograph Programmer ‘SE5000’ VU option should first be selected


via the ‘Tacho Select’ menu option

SE5000 MAIN MENU


:TACHO SELECT
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 543

Using MKII Programmer for Workshop card PIN


Authentication

ƒ The Programmer menu screens should be scrolled through using the ‘Left’
and ‘Right’ arrow buttons until the ‘ENTER PIN’ option is shown

SE5000 MAIN MENU


:ENTER PIN

ƒ Press the Programmer ‘ENTER’ button to initiate the PIN code entry and
enter the PIN code digits using the alpha-numeric buttons. When the
correct PIN code is displayed press the ‘ENTER’ button again to transfer the
PIN code to the VU to authenticate the Workshop card

Enter Code
:

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 544
Using MKII Programmer for Workshop Card PIN
Authentication – Non-Activated VU
ƒ A non-activated VU standard display will be similar to that shown below,

ƒ When a workshop card is first inserted in the VU and the VU ‘Confirm’ button
is pressed following successful PIN Entry, as shown below, or if the MKII is
used for successful PIN entry as described above, the automatic activation of
the VU will begin, including pairing to the sensor, as shown over
Note: The VU UTC time MUST be set to within the date validity period for the
Workshop card being inserted or the card will be rejected by the VU

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 545

Using MKII Programmer for Workshop Card PIN


Authentication – Non-Activated VU

ƒ Pairing is done automatically as part of activation. The VU display will be as


shown to highlight the VU is pairing to the motion sensor,

ƒ When pairing is complete, the VU display will automatically be as shown,


press ‘Confirm’ to acknowledge and clear the message

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 546
Using MKII Programmer for Workshop Card PIN
Authentication – Non-Activated VU

ƒ The VU will then automatically display the message as shown to indicate the
VU activation process is complete. Again press ‘Confirm’ to acknowledge and
clear the message

ƒ The VU display will then be the standard display as shown, but the unit is now
activated, as indicated by the calibration mode symbol in the top right corner
of the display

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 547

Using MKII Programmer for Workshop Card PIN


Authentication – Activated VU

ƒ For an activated VU, once the Workshop card PIN is authenticated, the VU
displays will be as shown. Bypass the manual entries option by selecting
the option screens as shown

ƒ If card insertion is on a new day, select the “Begin country” as ‘United


Kingdom’

ƒ Again, check the ‘calibration mode’ symbol is shown on the top right corner of
the VU display to confirm the card has been authenticated

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 548
Using MKII Programmer for VU UTC / Local Time Updating

ƒ A MKII Tachograph Programmer can also be used to update the VU ‘UTC’


and ‘Local’ times

ƒ The Programmer ‘TIME/DATE’ SE5000 menu option is used to modify these


VU times. Press the Programmer ‘ENTER’ button to initiate the time/date
change - the VU must be in the Calibration mode of operation or non-
activated

SE5000 MAIN MENU


:TIME/DATE

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 549

Using MKII Programmer for VU UTC / Local Time Updating

ƒ Press the ‘left’ or ‘right’ arrow keys to highlight either the ‘Current Time’,
‘Current Date’ or the local ‘Time Offset’ options. Press the Programmer
‘ENTER’ button again with the desired option highlighted and then modify
the date or time as required

Current time
:10:35

ƒ Press the Programmer ‘SEND’ button to transfer the new UTC date or time
or local offset time to the VU

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 550
Section 4.3.3

Bench Test of the SE 5000

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 551

Workshop Inspections - Bench Test

ƒ Take a technical printout from VU

ƒ Remove VU from the vehicle

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 552
Workshop Inspections - Bench Test

ƒ Visually check the following items and ensure that the unit has not been
tampered with

ƒ Installation plaque ƒ Tamperproof Label

ƒ Type Approval Label

ƒ Sealing of the VU

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 553

Workshop Inspections - Bench Test

ƒ Insert a Workshop card into slot 2 and then slot 1. For each slot, verify
the card can be authenticated by entering the PIN code through the keys
on the VU front panel. Note: ‘Long Press’ the ‘Confirm’ button to
authenticate the input PIN code

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 554
Workshop Inspections - Bench Test Using MKII

ƒ Perform a 1000m Distance Test


using a MKII programmer

ƒ Use a test speed of 50km/h for the


current VU K-factor setting

ƒ Confirm the speed displayed


on the VU is accurate to
±1km/h

ƒ Verify the final distance for the


test is accurate to ±1% and
also the VU odometer
advanced accurately

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 555

Workshop Inspections - Bench Test Using MKII

ƒ Perform the ‘Bench Test’ option from the MKII programmer

ƒ Initially the MKII programmer will perform speed tests using three speeds
40, 80 and 180km/h. Check all three test speeds are displayed on the VU
to an accuracy of ±1km/h

ƒ Verify that each duty, in the order; work, rest and available, can be
selected by the duty buttons on the VU. Check that the appropriate
symbol is displayed on the VU for each duty selected. Record each duty
for a minimum of one complete ‘VU’ minute

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 556
Section 4.3.4

Modification of VU Stored
Parameters Using a Stoneridge
MKII Tachograph Programmer

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 557

Using a MKII Programmer for Programming a VU - Reading

ƒ A MKII Tachograph Programmer is used to Program a VU

ƒ Initially the VU parameters must be read from the VU and a copy


transferred to the Programmer. The Programmer ‘READ ALL DATA’
SE5000 menu option is used to do this

SE5000 MAIN MENU


:READ ALL DATA

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 558
Using a MKII Programmer for Programming a VU - Reading

ƒ Press the Programmer ‘ENTER’ button to initiate the parameter data


transfer from the VU to the Programmer. The Programmer will display the
message shown while the data is being transferred and then a second
message as shown once the parameter transfer is completed

Reading data Data transfer OK


........

ƒ Once the VU parameters have been ‘read’ into the Programmer they can
then be modified individually

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 559

Using a MKII Programmer for Programming a VU –


Modifying & Sending

ƒ The VU parameters can be modified using the Programmer ‘MODIFY


DATA’ SE5000 menu option. Examples of the main VU ‘read’
parameters that can be modified are given later in the section

SE5000 MAIN MENU


:MODIFY DATA

ƒ Once a parameter has been modified the new value can then be ‘sent’
back to the VU. The VU must be in calibration mode or it will reject any
attempts to reprogram. The Programmer ‘SEND’ key can be used to
transmit individual parameters. The display will be as shown

Sending Data Sending Data


Data transfer OK

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 560
Using a MKII Programmer for Programming a VU –
Sending All Parameters

ƒ It is also possible to reprogram a VU with a whole set of updated


parameters. The ‘SEND ALL DATA’ SE5000 menu option can be used to do
this – great care must be taken when using this function

SE5000 MAIN MENU


:SEND ALL DATA

ƒ Press the Programmer ‘ENTER’ button to initiate the parameter data


transfer from the Programmer to the VU – the VU must be in the
calibration mode of operation. The Programmer will display the message
shown while the data is being transferred

Sending data
........

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 561

Using a MKII Programmer for Programming a VU –


Sending All Parameters

ƒ Once the parameter transfer to the VU is completed, the Programmer will


display the message shown

Data transfer OK

ƒ The successful transmission of the parameters can be confirmed by


‘reading’ back the programmed data and then checking the parameters
from the VU via ‘modify data’ as described previously,

SE5000 MAIN MENU SE5000 MAIN MENU


:READ ALL DATA :MODIFY DATA

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 562
Modification of VU Stored Parameters Using a Stoneridge
MKII Tachograph Programmer

ƒ Press the ‘Left’ and ‘Right’ Programmer arrow buttons to scroll through the
parameters that can be modified, e.g. K-factor as shown. The updated
parameters can then be ‘sent’ back to the VU as explained previously

K-factor
:8000

ƒ The full list of VU parameters that can be modified is vehicle OEM specific
and thus differs for different OEM specific VUs e.g. Scania, MAN, DC etc.
The main ‘common’ parameters are as follows:

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 563

Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ K-factor – Press ‘ENTER’ and key in new value. Press ‘ENTER’ again to
confirm the value

K-factor
:8000

ƒ Odometer – Press ‘ENTER’ and key in new value. Last digit input is
tenths, thus an odometer reading of 100.0 km should be input as 1000.
Press ‘ENTER’ again to confirm the new value

Odometer
:001548.7

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 564
Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Current time – This is the VU UTC time. Press ‘ENTER’ and a cursor will
flash over the first digit. Key in the current time and press ‘ENTER’ to
confirm the new time

Current time
:10:35

ƒ Current date – This is the VU UTC date. Press ‘ENTER’ and a cursor will
flash over the first digit. Key in the current date and press ‘ENTER’ to
confirm the new date
Current date
:17/11/2009

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 565

Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Time offset – This is used to update the VU Local Time. Press ‘ENTER’ and
use the ‘up’ and ‘down’ arrow buttons to select the Local time offset from the
VU master UTC time. Press ‘ENTER’ again to confirm the new value

Time offset
:+1 :+00

ƒ Output shaft factor – This value should not be changed from the factory
set value
O/P shaft factor
:8.140

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 566
Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ CANBus Enabled - Press ‘ENTER’ and use the ‘left’ or ‘right’ arrow
buttons to select ‘ON’ or ‘OFF’ as required, depending on the presence or
absence of CANBus in the vehicle. Press ‘ENTER’ again to confirm the
setting
CANBus enabled
:ON

ƒ Install date – This is the date that the VU was first installed in the vehicle.
Press ‘ENTER’ and a cursor will flash over the first digit. Key in the date of
VU installation and press ‘ENTER’ to confirm

Install date
:22/06/2006

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 567

Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Speedo Output Factor - Press ‘ENTER’ and key in a new value. Press
‘ENTER’ again to confirm the setting

Speedo OP factor
:6000

ƒ D6 pin function – Press ‘ENTER’ and use the ‘left’ or ‘right’ arrow buttons
to select ‘OFF’, ‘Revs Warning’ or ‘Speedometer’ as required. Press ‘ENTER’
again to confirm the setting

D6 pin function
:OFF

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 568
Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ VIN – Press ‘ENTER’ and key in the Vehicle Identification Number. This is
17 characters long. Press ‘ENTER’ again to confirm the VIN

VIN
:1234567890ABCDE

ƒ Service delay – This is a read-only parameter and is the time left to the
next 2-yearly inspection. The value is reset to 104 weeks each time the VU
is re-programmed with new calibration parameters

Service delay
:104 weeks

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 569

Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Reset Heartbeat – Press ‘ENTER’ and use the ‘left’ or ‘right’ arrow buttons
to toggle the setting between ‘Off’ and ‘On’. Press ‘ENTER’ again to confirm
the setting. This parameter when ‘On’ causes the vehicle cluster presence to
be confirmed by the VU

Reset Heartbeat
:ON

ƒ L-Factor – Press ‘ENTER’ and a curser will flash over the first digit. Key in
the new value as required. Press ‘ENTER’ again to confirm the new value

L-factor
:3159 mm

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 570
Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Tyre Size – Press ‘ENTER’ and key in the Tyre Size. This can be up to 15
characters long. Press ‘ENTER’ to confirm the new size

Tyre Size
:295/80R22.5

ƒ Next Calibration Date – Press ‘ENTER’ and a cursor will flash over the first
digit. Key in the date when the calibration is next due and press ‘ENTER’
again to confirm the date
Note: this parameter must be set each time a VU is reprogrammed as part
of a vehicle calibration or inspection

Next Calib. Date


:19/05/2008
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 571

Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Vehicle Registering Nation – Press ‘ENTER’ and key in the new value –
this can be up to 3 characters long. Press ‘ENTER’ again to confirm the
nation. This parameter is also referred to as the Registering Member State

Veh. Reg. Nation


:UK

ƒ Vehicle Registration Number – Press ‘ENTER’ and key in the new


value – this can be up to 13 characters long. Press ‘ENTER’ again to
confirm the new VRN. There must be no spaces between the characters
in the VRN and the ‘space’ character must be used for any unused digits
at the end of the VRN
VRN
:SE06SED
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 572
Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Speed Authorised – Press ‘ENTER’ and a cursor will flash over the first
digit. Key in the Speed authorised value (3-digits maximum). Press ‘ENTER’
again to confirm the new ‘overspeed’ setting. Note: it is a VOSA requirement
that the programmed speed authorised setting MUST be as per the VOSA
ATC Manual Digital Speed Setting table (Appendix A)

Speed Authorised
:90 km/h

ƒ Illumination Input – Press ‘ENTER’ and use the ‘left’ or ‘right’ arrow
buttons to toggle between ‘Off’, ‘A2 only’ and ‘CAN only’. Press ‘ENTER’
again to confirm the setting

Illum. Input
:A2 only
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 573

Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Preferred Language – Press ‘ENTER’ and a cursor will flash over the first
digit. Key in the required preferred language code i.e. ‘en’ for English, ‘de’
for German, ‘fr’ for French etc, and press ‘ENTER’ again to confirm the new
‘preferred language’ setting
Pref. Language
:en

ƒ Next Calibration Pre-warning time – Press ‘ENTER’ and key in the new
value. Press ‘ENTER’ again to confirm the value. This can be from 0 to
255 and is the time in days before the next calibration date that a VU will
start to warn a user that a calibration is due
Pre-Next Calib.
:30

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 574
Parameters that can be Modified

ƒ Warranty Time – This parameter defaults to 24 months at the Activation


of a VU. Prior to VU activation, the parameter can be set between 0 and
36 months where applicable. Once the VU is activated, press ‘ENTER’ and
the display will update to show the VU warranty time left from the current
date

Warranty Time
:24 months

ƒ W-factor – Press ‘ENTER’ and key in new value. Press ‘ENTER’ again to
confirm the value

W-factor
:8000

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 575

MKII Programmer and VU Practical Exercise

ƒ Use a MKII Programmer to ‘Read All Data’ from a Stoneridge VU

ƒ Use the ‘Modify Data’ function to update the W & K-factors to 4567 pul/km,
the L-factor to 2345 mm and to program the ‘Next Calibration Date’
appropriately

ƒ Update the VU with the modified parameters using the Programmer individual
parameter ‘SEND’ function

ƒ ‘Read’ the VU parameters again with the Programmer to confirm the VU


parameter update has been successful

ƒ Remove workshop card from the VU to close the calibration session

ƒ Take a Technical Data printout to confirm the calibration update

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 576
Section 4.4

Using the CITO Download Tool

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 577

Using the CITO Downloading Tool

ƒ Overview of the Stoneridge CITO Tool

ƒ Stoneridge CITO Tool Downloading of Workshop Card Calibration Records

ƒ Uploading Data from a Stoneridge CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ CITO Workshop Software Installation Plaque Generation Procedure

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 578
Section 4.4.1

Overview of the Stoneridge


CITO Tool

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 579

Overview of Stoneridge CITO Tool

ƒ Principal functions are to download data either from


a Digital VU or a Workshop Smartcard

ƒ Interfaces with the CITO Workshop Software for


data storage, file management and printing

ƒ Supports data downloads from all Digital


Tachograph types

ƒ Can store 20 full VU downloads or more than 500


smartcard downloads

ƒ Data downloaded into CITO unit is automatically


erased following successful upload of data to PC
database
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 580
Overview of Stoneridge CITO Tool

ƒ Backlit LCD

ƒ Powered by 4 removable AA batteries

ƒ 4-Pin DIN socket for connection to VU download


RS232 communications interface. The CITO unit
automatically adjusts to faster data transfer rate

ƒ Smartcard socket used for downloading of


Workshop cards

ƒ USB socket for connection to PC data upload USB


port

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 581

Overview of Stoneridge CITO Tool

ƒ ‘Fast Key’ VU downloading by a single


keypress

ƒ ‘Fast Key’ Workshop Smartcard


downloading by a single keypress when
calibrating & programming VU

ƒ Individual download transfer request


messages selectable

ƒ Automatic unit switch off when not used


for 10 minutes to increase battery life

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 582
Overview of Stoneridge CITO Tool

ƒ Simple Menu Structure

ƒ Diagnostics menu for checking battery and


memory status

ƒ Settings menu for time setting, backlight


selection, LCD contrast adjustments and
language selection

ƒ Download menu for individual VU data


downloading

ƒ Always set CITO tool to UTC time

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 583

Section 4.4.2

Stoneridge CITO Tool


Downloading of Workshop Card
Calibration Records

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 584
Downloading Workshop Card Records

ƒ The CITO unit should initially be powered by pressing the ‘ON/OFF’ button
– wait for the unit to initialise

ƒ The required workshop smartcard to be downloaded should be inserted


into the CITO unit smartcard socket with the smartcard chip facing
upwards

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 585

Downloading Workshop Card Records

ƒ For downloading the entire smartcard data memory contents the


‘download-smartcard’ ‘Fast-Key’ should be pressed and the data download
will then begin

ƒ Whilst the download process is continuing, the CITO unit will display a
‘Reading data’ message as shown
ƒ Once the download process is complete, the CITO unit will display a ‘Data
Transfer OK’ message as shown to confirm the download

Reading data Data transfer OK


......

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 586
Section 4.4.3

Uploading Workshop Card Data


from a Stoneridge CITO Tool to
a PC

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 587

Uploading Data from CITO - Interfacing CITO Tool to a PC

Insert USB Cable Connector into CITO USB


Socket

Insert USB Cable Connector into PC USB


Port

Insert USB Software key (Dongle) into PC


USB Port. Note: when the Centre is not
operating the software key must be securely
stored in the Workshop floor safe

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 588
Uploading Data from a CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ Upload of data held in a CITO Tool can be carried out by a PC running the
CITO Workshop PC software

ƒ All interaction between the Stoneridge CITO Tool and the PC is controlled
by the PC with the CITO Tool acting as the slave

ƒ The CITO Tool will automatically respond to upload signals from a PC

ƒ For upload to be possible by a Workshop Technician, the PC CITO


Workshop software must be operating in a password protected mode of
operation for data security purposes, and the software key (dongle) must
be present in the USB port

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 589

Uploading Data from a Stoneridge CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ The CITO Tool must be switched on or the data upload to the PC CITO
Database will not be possible

ƒ The data upload USB cable must be connected between the CITO Tool and
the PC USB port as shown above

ƒ The CITO Workshop PC software must be ‘run’ on the PC by clicking on the


CITO Icon on the Desktop

ƒ Initially the CITO login screen will be displayed on the PC

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 590
Uploading Data from a Stoneridge CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ A valid User Name and Password must then be input to access the CITO
database

ƒ The Password is personal to each workshop technician and must not be


given to other workshop personnel

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 591

Uploading Data from a Stoneridge CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ If the correct Password is input for a valid User Name then the main menu
will be displayed as shown below

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 592
Uploading Data from a Stoneridge CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ To upload data from the CITO Tool to the CITO PC database, the
‘Download Centre’ should be executed by clicking on the correct
Icon

ƒ Highlight the CITO Download Tool option then Click ‘Next’ and the
Download wizard will automatically begin the data transfer to the
PC database

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 593

Uploading Data from a Stoneridge CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ The PC software will then search for the connection to the CITO Tool

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 594
Uploading Data from a Stoneridge CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ Once the CITO device is detected the data transfer to the PC will
automatically begin

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 595

Uploading Data from a Stoneridge CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ Once the data transfer to the PC is complete, the software then saves
the data received from the CITO Tool to the database

ƒ After the data has been safely stored in the PC database, the data in
the CITO Tool will be automatically deleted

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 596
Uploading Data from a Stoneridge CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ Once the Card data, as listed, has been saved to the database click
‘Finish’ to return to the CITO software main menu

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 597

Section 4.4.4

CITO Workshop Software


Installation Plaque Generation
Procedure

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 598
CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options - Reports

ƒ From the main menu the ‘Report Centre’ option should be


selected by clicking the appropriate Icon

ƒ The screen will then be as shown and the required report option
should be highlighted before selecting ‘Next’ to proceed

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 599

CITO Workshop Software Report Centre Options –


Installation Plaque Generation

ƒ Assuming the ‘Digital plaques not yet printed’ option was selected previously,
the next stage is to select the vehicle for which the plaque is to be produced

ƒ The screen will be similar to below and the required vehicle option (VIN/VRN)
should be highlighted before selecting ‘Next’ to proceed

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 600
CITO Workshop Software Report Centre Options –
Installation Plaque Generation

ƒ Once the vehicle is selected, the next stage is to select the date for which
the plaque is to be produced

ƒ The screen will then be similar to that shown and the required date option
should be highlighted before selecting ‘Next’ to proceed

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 601

CITO Workshop Software Report Centre Options –


Installation Plaque Generation

ƒ The installation plaque details to be printed will then be automatically created


from the database stored information, and the screen will be as shown
below. The ‘Print’ option should be selected to print the plaque and the
‘Finish’ option selected to end the operation and return to the main menu

ƒ Click ‘Sign out’ to return to the log-in screen for security purposes
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 602
Any Questions?

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 603

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 604
Combined Analogue & Digital
Tachograph Course
Day 5

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 605

Day 5

ƒ 8:30 Exam Resit if applicable (days 1 to 3 only)


ƒ 9:00 Questions from yesterday
ƒ 9:10 Digital Tachograph Decommissioning and Backing Up the Database
ƒ 10:30 Tea Break
ƒ 10:45 Digital Course Summary
ƒ 11:45 Warranty
ƒ 12:15 Lunch
ƒ 12:45 Questions pre Digital Exams
ƒ 13:00 Exam – practical group 1
ƒ 13:30 Exam – practical group 2
ƒ 14:00 Tea Break
ƒ 14:15 Written Digital Exam
ƒ 14:45 Exam Finish
ƒ 15:15 Exam Results and Course Feedback
ƒ 15:30 Course End
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 606
Section 5.1

Decommissioning Procedure
for a VU

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 607

Decommissioning Procedure

ƒ Remove the VU from the vehicle

ƒ Download the VU data memory contents

ƒ The downloaded data must be securely stored for at least 1 year

ƒ The workshop must inform the current vehicle owner in writing that they
are holding data that belongs to the owner

ƒ After a written request, a copy of any Company-locked decommissioned


data can be exported to the data owner. Note: keep a copy of the written
customer request

ƒ If download is not possible, a certificate must be issued and a copy of the


certificate must be kept for 1 year

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 608
Section 5.1.1

Downloading VU Memory
Contents

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 609

Interfacing of the CITO Tool

ƒ Interfacing of the CITO Tool to a VU is done via the CITO 4-pin DIN
connector and the VU 6-way front download connector

ƒ Interfacing of the CITO Tool to a PC is done via the CITO USB interface
and a PC USB Port

ƒ All connectors are keyed so that wrongly inserting them is not possible

ƒ The VU 6-way connector is exposed by first removing the paper cassette as


shown in the slides that follow,

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 610
Interfacing the CITO Tool to a VU

1. Gently press the fascia in the middle near the top of the VU. 2. This will result in the fascia tilting outwards at the bottom.

3. Hold the fascia at the bottom where it is tilting outwards. 4. Gently pull the fascia/mechanism forward out of the VU.

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 611

Interfacing the CITO Tool to a VU

VU Front 6-Way Download Connector

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 612
Interfacing the CITO Tool to a VU

Insert 4 way DIN Connector into CITO 4


Way DIN Socket

Insert D-shaped 6 Way Connector into VU


6 Way Download Socket

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 613

Downloading Data from a VU to the CITO Tool

ƒ All interaction between the CITO Tool and a VU is controlled by the CITO
Tool

ƒ The VU will automatically respond to download signals from a CITO Tool as


long as the VU is not fitted in a moving vehicle

ƒ For a download to be possible by a Workshop, the VU must be in the


calibration mode of operation with an authenticated Workshop card
inserted

ƒ Download is also possible in the Company mode of operation, for company


specific data downloads only

ƒ Control officers may download with the VU in the Control mode of


operation

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 614
CITO Fast-Key VU Data Download

ƒ The CITO unit should initially be powered by pressing


the ‘ON/OFF’ button as shown – wait for the unit to
initialise

ƒ The download cable should be connected between the


VU and the CITO Tool as described above and a
workshop card should be inserted into the VU as is
required

ƒ For downloading the VU data memory contents, i.e.


when decommissioning a faulty VU, the ‘download-VU’
‘Fast-Key’ should be pressed, as shown, and the data
download will then begin

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 615

CITO Fast-Key VU Data Download

ƒ Whilst the download process is continuing, the VU will display a


‘Downloading’ message and the CITO unit will display ‘Reading data’ as
shown
Reading data
......

ƒ Once the VU download process is complete, the CITO unit will emit an
audible beep and then display a final ‘Data Transfer OK’ message as
shown to confirm the download is completed successfully

Data transfer OK

ƒ Press the ‘MENU’ button to acknowledge the message

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 616
CITO Menu Driven Data Download

ƒ Individual data segments can be downloaded from a VU via


the CITO ‘Download Menu’

ƒ The CITO unit should initially be powered by pressing the


‘ON/OFF’ button

ƒ The download cable should be connected between the VU and


the CITO Tool as described above and a workshop card
should be inserted into the VU as is required

ƒ Press the ‘left’ or ‘right’ arrow buttons until the ‘Download


Menu’ option is shown on the CITO unit

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 617

CITO Menu Driven Data Download

ƒ Press the ‘Enter’ button to enter the download sub-menu

ƒ Press the ‘left’ or ‘right’ arrow buttons until the required


download option is displayed from:- Overview, Full Download,
Events & Faults, Detailed Speed, Technical Data and Activities

ƒ The overview data will always be downloaded as part of any


download

ƒ Press the ‘Enter’ button again to select the required download


option in the CITO unit

ƒ The date of the data to be downloaded will have to be entered if


the ‘Activities’ option is selected, and then the download process
will begin
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 618
CITO Menu Driven Data Download

ƒ Whilst the download process is continuing, the VU will display a


‘Downloading’ message and the CITO unit will display ‘Reading data’ as
shown
Reading data
......

ƒ Once the download process is complete, the CITO unit will emit an
audible beep and display a ‘Data Transfer OK’ message as shown to
confirm the requested download is completed successfully

Data transfer OK

ƒ Press the ‘MENU’ button to acknowledge the message

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 619

Section 5.1.2

Uploading VU Download Data


from a Stoneridge CITO Tool
to a PC

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 620
Interfacing the CITO Tool to a PC

Insert USB Cable Connector into CITO USB


Socket

Insert USB Cable Connector into PC USB


Port

Insert USB Software key (Dongle) into PC


USB Port. Note: when the Centre is not
operating the software key must be securely
stored in the Workshop floor safe

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 621

Uploading Data from a CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ Upload of data held in a CITO Tool can be carried out by a PC running the
CITO Workshop PC software

ƒ All interaction between the Stoneridge CITO Tool and the PC is controlled by
the PC with the CITO Tool acting as the slave

ƒ The CITO Tool will automatically respond to upload signals from a PC

ƒ For upload to be possible by a Workshop, the PC CITO Workshop software


must be operating in a password protected mode of operation for data
security purposes, and the software key (dongle) must be present in the USB
port

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 622
Uploading Data from a Stoneridge CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ The CITO Tool must be switched on or the data upload to the PC CITO
Database will not be possible

ƒ The data upload USB cable must be connected between the CITO Tool and
the PC USB port as shown above

ƒ The CITO Workshop PC software must be ‘run’ on the PC by clicking on the


CITO Icon on the Desktop

ƒ Initially the CITO login screen will be displayed – login in exactly the same
way as described previously

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 623

Uploading Data from a Stoneridge CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ To upload data from the CITO Tool to the CITO PC database, the
‘Download Centre’ should be executed by clicking on the correct
Icon from the Main Menu

ƒ Highlight the CITO Download Tool option then Click ‘Next’ and the
Download wizard will automatically begin the data transfer to the
PC database

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 624
Uploading Data from a Stoneridge CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ The PC will then automatically find the CITO tool and download the
data. Once the data transfer is complete, the PC software then saves
the data received to the PC CITO database
ƒ After the data has been securely stored in the PC database, the data in
the CITO Tool will be automatically deleted

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 625

Uploading Data from a Stoneridge CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ Once the VU data, as listed, has been saved to the database click
‘Finish’ to return to the CITO software main menu

ƒ Click ‘Sign out’ to return to the log-in screen for security purposes

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 626
Section 5.1.3

Exporting CITO Workshop


Software Stored Data

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 627

CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options Data Centre

ƒ From the Main Menu the ‘Data Centre’ option should be selected by
clicking the Icon

ƒ The screen will then be as shown and the required Data Centre
function should be highlighted before selecting ‘Next’ to proceed.
Note: access to ‘Restore database’ is restricted

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 628
CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options -
Export Authority Data

ƒ This function is used to give a copy of any vehicle decommissioned data to a


requesting authority such as VOSA

ƒ Highlight the ‘Export authority data’ option before clicking ‘Next’

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 629

CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options -


Export Authority Data

ƒ If the ‘Export authority data’ option was selected, the next stage is to select
the vehicle for which the authority data export is required

ƒ Highlight the required vehicle before clicking ‘Next’

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 630
CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options -
Export Authority Data

ƒ Once the vehicle is selected, the next stage is to select the download date for
which the authority data export is required

ƒ Highlight the required date before clicking ‘Next’

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 631

CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options -


Export Authority Data

ƒ Once the required date has been selected, the next stage is to select the
location for the authority export data file

ƒ Click ‘Browse’ and select the required location before clicking ‘Next’

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 632
CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options -
Export Authority Data

ƒ Once the authority export data file has been saved to the desired location,
the screen will be as shown below to confirm completion

ƒ Click ‘Finish’ to end the ‘Export authority data’ operation

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 633

CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options -


Export Company Data

ƒ This function is used to give a copy of any vehicle decommissioned data to a


requesting Company who owns the data, as identified by Company Locking
information stored in the VU

ƒ Highlight the ‘Export company data’ option before clicking ‘Next’

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 634
CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options -
Export Company Data

ƒ If the ‘Export company data’ option was selected, the next stage is to select
the ‘Company’ for which the data export is required

ƒ Highlight the required Customer before clicking ‘Next’. Note: if the requesting
company is not listed, data must not be exported

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 635

CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options -


Export Company Data

ƒ Once the required customer has been selected, the next stage is to select the
vehicle for which the Company data export is required

ƒ Highlight the required vehicle-date before clicking ‘Next’

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 636
CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options -
Export Company Data

ƒ Once the required vehicle-date has been selected, the next stage is to select
the location for the Company export data file

ƒ Click ‘Browse’ and select the required location before clicking ‘Next’

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 637

CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options -


Export Company Data

ƒ Once the export data file has been saved to the desired location, the screen
will be as shown below to confirm completion

ƒ Click ‘Finish’ to end the ‘Export company data’ operation

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 638
Section 5.2

Other Functions of the CITO


Workshop Software

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 639

CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options

ƒ Download Centre – this is for transferring data from a


CITO Tool into the CITO PC software database, as
described previously
ƒ Report Centre – this is for creating digital and hardcopy
reports, as described previously
ƒ Tools and Settings – this displays data relating to the CITO
Workshop PC software that can be used for support
purposes
ƒ Data Centre – this option is used for the handling of data
including backing up, restoring files and exporting data
ƒ Sign Out – this is for logging out the current user and
returning to the initial ‘Log-in’ screen
ƒ Exit – this is used for ending the CITO Workshop program

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 640
CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options Tools and
Settings

ƒ From the Main Menu the ‘Tools and Settings’ option should be
selected by clicking the Icon – the screen will then be as shown

ƒ This information is technical support purposes – when calling for


support you will be asked to quote these figures along with the
relevant ‘dll’ file names

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 641

CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options Data Centre


Backup Database

ƒ The ‘Backup database’ option should initially be highlighted as shown

ƒ Select ‘Next’ to proceed the ‘Backup database’ operation

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 642
CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options Data Centre
Backup Database

ƒ Backing-up the database must be regularly carried out in case the primary
data store fails

ƒ If the ‘Backup database’ option was selected, the next stage is to select the
location for the backup file to be saved i.e. ‘Browse’

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 643

CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options Data Centre


Backup Database

ƒ When ‘browsing’ for the location the screen will be similar to that shown

ƒ When the desired location has been found a suitable file name should be
input and then ‘Save’ selected to create the backup file

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 644
CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options Backup
Database

ƒ Once the filename and location have been selected then the confirmation
screen will be similar to that shown below

ƒ Click ‘Next’ to save the file

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 645

CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options Backup


Database

ƒ Once the database backup file has been securely ‘saved’, the screen will be
as shown below to confirm the completion

ƒ Click ‘Finish’ to end the database backup operation

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 646
CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options Backup
Database

ƒ After the database backup file has been ‘saved’, it is recommended that
a copy of the securely stored backup file is copied to a CD-ROM or a
memory stick or off-site secure network in case the primary storage area
fails

ƒ CD burning capability is not part of the CITO software package. The


software package present on the PC should be used for this purpose

ƒ The back-up CD-ROM or memory stick if used should be safely stored in


the Workshop safe

ƒ It is important that the backed up data is kept in a structured format.


We would recommend that the following filename system is used year-
month-day.sbf, 2005-03-22.sbf

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 647

Any Questions?

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 648
Section 5.3

Digital Tachograph Course


Summary

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 649

Digital Tachograph Course Summary

ƒ Using and Programming the Vehicle Unit

ƒ Workshops and Digital Tachographs

ƒ Downloading and Uploading of Stored Data

ƒ Workshop Requirements

ƒ Questions

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 650
Section 5.3.1

Using And Programming


The Vehicle Unit

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 651

Digital Tachograph System

Vehicle Unit

Motion Sensor

Cluster
Driver Smartcard
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 652
Description of Controls

Return Display Confirm Paper


Button Button Cassette

Driver Driver Duty- Crew Duty- Crew


Up Down Printer
Smartcard Change / Change / Smartcard
Button Button Paper Slot
Drawer Smartcard Smartcard Drawer
Eject Button Eject Button

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 653

Universal Time Co-ordinated - UTC

ƒ ALL VUs operate using UTC as their master reference time – all driving
event times stored, displayed or printed are UTC times

ƒ UTC replaced GMT in 1986 as the world standard for time

ƒ UTC does not change due to seasonal adjustment i.e. no concept of


“Summer time”

ƒ Workshops MUST set VU master time to UTC

ƒ Local time is available to a VU user for display purposes only

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 654
Printouts

ƒ There are 6 legally required types of VU printout available:

ƒ Daily driver activities from card

ƒ Daily driver activities from VU

ƒ Warnings from card - events and faults

ƒ Warnings from VU - events and faults

ƒ Technical data

ƒ Overspeed data

ƒ Note: Additional non-legal printouts are available to show ‘Local-time’


versions of Daily Driver Activity for a card or a VU, and where applicable,
occurrences of D1/D2 events, vehicle engine speed bands and vehicle
speed bands
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 655

Overview of the Stoneridge MKII Tachograph Programmer

ƒ New updated version of software for VUs

ƒ MKII Tachograph Programmer Supports analogue


and digital Tachograph types

ƒ All existing MKII Tachograph Programmers are


software upgradeable

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 656
Interfacing a Stoneridge VU to the MKII Programmer

Insert DIN Connector into MKII


Programmer 8-Way DIN Socket

Insert D-shaped 6-Way Connector into VU


6-Way Programming Socket

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 657

Interaction Between the MKII Tachograph Programmer


and the Stoneridge VU

ƒ All interaction between the MKII Programmer and a Stoneridge VU is


controlled by the MKII Programmer

ƒ In the operational mode, the VU will only allow its internal parameters to
be read by an external device

ƒ In the calibration mode of operation, i.e. VU has an authenticated


Workshop card inserted, the VU will respond to bench test, speed simulator
and parameter re-programming signals

ƒ A Workshop card that is inserted into a VU can be PIN code authenticated


using the VU keypad. However, for the SE5000 it can also be
authenticated directly from a MKII Programmer. Note: for VDO and Actia
units the number of digits in the PIN code must be entered before the PIN
code itself

ƒ Always set the clock on the MKII Programmer to UTC time


© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 658
Using a MKII Programmer for Programming a VU - Reading

ƒ A MKII Tachograph Programmer is used to Program a VU

ƒ Initially the VU parameters must be read from the VU and a copy


transferred to the Programmer. The Programmer ‘READ ALL DATA’
SE5000 menu option is used to do this

SE5000 MAIN MENU


:READ ALL DATA

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 659

Using a MKII Programmer for Programming a VU - Reading

ƒ Press the Programmer ‘ENTER’ button to initiate the parameter data


transfer from the VU to the Programmer. The Programmer will display the
message shown while the data is being transferred and then a second
message as shown once the parameter transfer is completed

Reading data Data transfer OK


........

ƒ Once the VU parameters have been ‘read’ into the Programmer they can
then be modified individually

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 660
Using a MKII Programmer for Programming a VU –
Modifying & Sending

ƒ The VU parameters can be modified using the Programmer ‘MODIFY


DATA’ SE5000 menu option

SE5000 MAIN MENU


:MODIFY DATA

ƒ Once a parameter has been modified the new value can then be ‘sent’
back to the VU. The VU must be in calibration mode or it will reject any
attempts to reprogram. The Programmer ‘SEND’ key can be used to
transmit individual parameters. The display will be as shown

Sending Data

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 661

Using a MKII Programmer for Programming a VU –


Sending and Verifying Parameters

ƒ Once the parameter transfer to the VU is completed, the Programmer will


display the message shown

Sending Data
Data transfer OK

ƒ The successful transmission of the parameters can be confirmed by


‘reading’ back the programmed data and then checking the parameters
from the VU via ‘modify data’ as described previously

SE5000 MAIN MENU


:READ ALL DATA

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 662
Section 5.3.2

Workshops and Digital Tachographs

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 663

Workshop Approval

ƒ All workshops must have VOSA approval before they can work on Digital
Tachograph systems

ƒ Workshop Technicians must be holders of valid in-date analogue and digital


certificates or a combined certificate before they can work on Digital
Tachograph systems

ƒ Workshops must have a Designated Manager, and must operate as a secure


environment ensuring that all workshop cards are properly used and
securely stored when not in use

ƒ VOSA approved equipment must be used for all Digital Tachograph work

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 664
Pre-Installation of a Digital Tachograph System

ƒ It is essential that prior to fitment of an SE5000


VU the following items are checked

ƒ The VU data label must show the correct


Stoneridge VU type approval number, i.e. E5
0002

ƒ The tamper label must be intact

ƒ The Stoneridge hologram must be correct

ƒ The VU should have no evidence of physical


damage or tampering

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 665

Installation of a Digital Tachograph System

ƒ Fitting the gearbox motion sensor and the sensor cable

ƒ Making required power and signal connections

ƒ Mounting the VU

ƒ Pairing the VU and motion sensor. This will automatically occur as part of
the activation process – all VUs will always auto-pair

ƒ Activating the VU, verify the activation symbol () disappears

ƒ Calibrating and programming of the VU system

ƒ Sealing the VU system

ƒ Completion and fitment of a VU installation plaque. Complete paperwork


and update GV212. GV212 must be in VOSA accepted electronic format
from 1st January 2010
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 666
Activating, Calibrating and Programming the VU for Use

ƒ A VU is delivered non-activated, activation occurs automatically on first


insertion of a valid PIN authenticated workshop card

ƒ Access to Calibration functions is granted while non-activated, even when


not in Calibration Mode

ƒ After activation, VU is fully operational including recording functions

ƒ A Workshop card is required to program calibration parameters into a VU

ƒ Programming should be carried out using a VOSA approved device such as


the Stoneridge Digital Tachograph Programmer

ƒ 1st calibration of the VU system must be within 2 weeks of installation or


VRN allocation

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 667

Calibration Records – VU and Card

ƒ After programming a VU with new calibration parameters, a calibration


record is generated and stored in the VU. The record includes

• The calibration purpose


• Workshop details
• VIN & VRN
• The W, K & L factors
• The tyre size
• Speed limiter setting, if appropriate
• The odometer value
• The UTC time
• Due date of next calibration

ƒ A similar calibration record is generated and stored on the Workshop card


used to perform the calibration

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 668
Installation Plaque

ƒ The final part of the Digital Tachograph installation procedure is the


generation and fitment of an installation plaque. Note: the installation
plaque must be generated automatically

ƒ Installation Plaque must be fitted on or beside the VU and must be visible at


all times. The plaque is valid for 2 years

ƒ After each inspection a new plaque must be fitted in place of the previous
one

ƒ Information on the plaque must include


ƒ Name and address of approved technician or
workshop
ƒ W, K and L factors
ƒ Tyre size
ƒ VIN
ƒ Date of W & L factor determination
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 669

Workshop Inspections – Reasons for Inspection

ƒ After any repair of the equipment. Replacement of the paper cassette does
not constitute a repair of the VU

ƒ If the motion sensor seal is broken

ƒ After any alteration to the W or L factors

ƒ If the VU UTC clock time is inaccurate by more than 20 minutes

ƒ When it has been 2 years since the last inspection

ƒ If the VRN has changed

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 670
Workshop Inspections – Inspection Procedure

ƒ A visual inspection must be carried out to ensure that the


unit has not been tampered with and no security breach
attempts have been made. In cases of tampering see VOSA
warning notice GV215 for further advice

ƒ The VU manufacturers’ label and type approval mark must


be checked, i.e. E5 0002

ƒ Check all system seals are intact

ƒ Bench Test the Digital Tachograph

ƒ The tyre size and actual circumference of the drive wheels


must be checked

ƒ The presence and content of the current installation plaque


must be checked – record any anomalies on the Inspection
report
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 671

Workshop Inspections – Inspection Procedure

ƒ Check that the recording equipment functions correctly, including data


storage on smartcards

ƒ Check the integrity of the Motion Sensor/VU connection using an


independent cable connected directly from the sensor to the VU

ƒ Confirm that the unit operates to within maximum tolerances for both
speed and distance and check that its UTC time is set correctly

ƒ A mandatory vehicle re-calibration must be carried out. Program the new


VU calibration parameters and also the ‘Next Calibration Date’ to 2 years
on. Check all other VU programmable parameters are set correctly

ƒ A new installation plaque must be fitted after the inspection is completed


and an inspection report/calibration certificate must be issued to the
vehicle owner to confirm the inspection completion. Update the GV212 –
2009 VOSA manual indicates that this must be in a VOSA accepted
electronic format from 1/1/2010
© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 672
Workshop Inspections – Inspection Report

ƒ After each Workshop inspection an


inspection report should be issued to the
owner of the VU

ƒ Information on the inspection report will


typically include,
ƒ The VU owner
ƒ The VU manufacturer
ƒ The VU model and serial number
ƒ The VIN and VRN
ƒ The result of the inspection
ƒ The date of the certificate issue

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 673

Repair and Decommissioning of Vehicle Units

ƒ Due to the security requirements of Digital Tachograph systems there


are no repairable parts in a Stoneridge VU

ƒ A VU case must never be opened as this would be a breach of Digital


Tachograph security, making the VU invalid

ƒ Replacement of the paper cassette is permitted – this is NOT classed


as a repair

ƒ Faulty VUs must be decommissioned using the method described as


follows –

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 674
Decommissioning Procedure

ƒ Remove the VU from the vehicle

ƒ Download the VU data memory contents

ƒ The downloaded data must be securely stored for at least 1 year

ƒ The workshop must inform the current vehicle owner in writing that they are
holding data that belongs to the owner

ƒ After a written request, a copy of any Company-locked decommissioned data


can be exported to the data owner. Note: keep a copy of the written customer
request

ƒ If download is not possible, a certificate must be issued and a copy of the


certificate must be kept for 1 year

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 675

Workshop Requirements

ƒ Workshops must comply with all aspects of the VOSA ‘Approved Tachograph
Centre Manual’. All newly qualified Technicians must read the manual as a
VOSA legal requirement. Technicians breaking any rules will be subject to
VOSA disciplinary procedures as described in the manual

ƒ Downloaded data must be kept safe and secure, preferably using a firesafe or
off-site security storage system. This data must be encrypted or password
protected

ƒ Workshops must have a Designated Manager

ƒ Workshop cards must be kept in a secure facility within the workshop. This
will be a safe secured in the Workshop floor. VOSA manual describes the
rules which apply

ƒ Improper use of a Workshop card is fully traceable


© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 676
Section 5.3.3

Downloading and Uploading of VU


Stored Data

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 677

Data Downloading

ƒ Downloading is the copying of a partial or a complete set of data that is


stored in VU memory or on a smartcard

ƒ All VU downloading must be done when the vehicle is stationary or the VU


is removed from the vehicle

ƒ Workshops

ƒ Must download the memory contents with the VU in the calibration


mode, when decommissioning “failed” VUs

ƒ Must read Workshop Card calibration records

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 678
Workshop Download Tool - CITO

ƒ Sufficient Memory space for 20 full VU data


downloads

ƒ Data download from VU via RS232 communications


interface, front 6-way connector

ƒ Data upload to PC via USB interface

ƒ Software for Data Storage, Management and


Printing

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 679

Interfacing the CITO Tool to a VU

Insert 4 way DIN Connector into CITO 4


Way DIN Socket

Insert D-shaped 6 Way Connector into VU


6 Way Download Socket

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 680
Interfacing the CITO Tool to a PC

Insert USB Cable Connector into CITO USB


Socket

Insert USB Cable Connector into PC USB


Port

Insert USB Software Key (Dongle) into PC


USB Port. Note: when the Centre is not
operating the software key must be securely
stored in the Workshop floor safe

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 681

CITO Fast-Key VU Data Download

ƒ The CITO unit should initially be powered by pressing


the ‘ON/OFF’ button as shown – wait for the unit to
initialise

ƒ The download cable should be connected between the


VU and the CITO Tool as described previously and a
workshop card should be inserted into the VU as is
required

ƒ For downloading the VU data memory contents the


‘download-VU’ ‘Fast-Key’ should be pressed, as shown,
and the data download will then begin

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 682
CITO Fast-Key Smartcard Data Download

ƒ For downloading the entire smartcard data memory contents the


‘download-smartcard’ ‘Fast-Key’ should be pressed and the data download
will then begin

ƒ Whilst the download process is continuing, the CITO unit will display a
‘Reading data’ message as shown
ƒ Once the download process is complete, the CITO unit will display a ‘Data
Transfer OK’ message as shown to confirm the download

Reading data Data transfer OK


......

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 683

Uploading Data from a CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ All interaction between the Stoneridge CITO Tool and the PC is controlled
by the PC with the CITO Tool acting as the slave

ƒ For upload to be possible by a Workshop, the PC CITO Workshop software


must be operating in a password protected mode of operation for data
security purposes, and the software key must be present in the USB port

ƒ The CITO Tool must be switched on or the data upload to the PC CITO
Database will not be possible

ƒ The CITO Workshop PC software must be ‘run’ on the PC by clicking on the


CITO Icon on the Desktop

ƒ Initially the CITO login screen will be displayed on the PC

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 684
Uploading Data from a CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ A valid User Name and Password must then be input to access the CITO
database

ƒ The Password is personal to each workshop technician and must not be


given to other workshop personnel

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 685

Uploading Data from a CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ If the correct password is input for a valid User Name then the main menu
will be displayed as shown below

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 686
Uploading Data from a CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ To upload data from the CITO Tool to the CITO PC database, the
‘Download Centre’ should be executed by clicking on the correct
Icon

ƒ Click ‘Next’ and the Download wizard will automatically begin the
data transfer to the PC database

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 687

Uploading Data from a CITO Tool to a PC

ƒ Once the data transfer to the PC is complete, the software then saves
the data received from the CITO Tool to the database

ƒ After the data has been safely stored in the PC database, the data in
the CITO Tool will be automatically deleted

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 688
CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options - Reports

ƒ From the Main Menu the ‘Report Centre’ option should be selected
by clicking the Icon

ƒ The screen will then be as shown and the required report option
should be highlighted before selecting ‘Next’ to proceed

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 689

CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options Installation


Plaque Generation

ƒ Assuming the ‘Digital Plaques not yet printed’ option was selected previously,
the next stage is to select the vehicle for which the plaque is to be produced

ƒ The screen will then be similar to below and the required vehicle option
(VIN/VRN) should be highlighted before selecting ‘Next’ to proceed

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 690
CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options Installation
Plaque Generation

ƒ The installation plaque details to be printed will then be automatically created


from the database stored information, and the screen will be as shown below

ƒ The ‘Print’ option should be selected to print the plaque and the ‘Finish’
option selected to end the operation

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 691

CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options Data Centre

ƒ From the main menu the ‘Data Centre’ option should be selected by
clicking the Icon

ƒ The screen will then be as shown and the required Data Centre
function should be highlighted before selecting ‘Next’ to proceed.
Note: access to ‘Restore database’ is restricted

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 692
CITO Workshop Software Main Menu Options – Backup
Database

ƒ When ‘browsing’ for the location the screen will be similar to that shown

ƒ When the desired location has been found a suitable file name should be
input and then ‘Save’ selected to create the backup file

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 693

Any Questions?

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 694
Section 5.4

Warranty

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 695

Stoneridge Warranty Statement

ƒ Subject to the conditions stated herein, Stoneridge Electronics warrants to


purchasers thereof that Tachographs, Programmers, and accessories sold
by Stoneridge Electronics as original equipment or service parts,
(individually and collectively referred to hereafter as the "Product") will,
when properly assembled and installed on vehicles approved for such
purpose, be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal
use and proper maintenance for the applicable warranty period as stated
below

ƒ Stoneridge Electronics assumes no responsibility, in the absence of


Stoneridge written approval, for the selection of Product for specific
applications and makes no general representation whatever in respect of
any such selection

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 696
Stoneridge Warranty Statement (continued)

ƒ Product supplied by Stoneridge but manufactured by others (i.e.


Hubodometers, Road Speed Limiters etc) shall be warranted only to the
extent of the manufacturer's warranty

ƒ If any product supplied fails to comply with this warranty, Stoneridge


Electronics agrees to supply a replacement product for the defective
product, or in the case of Hand Held Programmers, Speed Simulators, or
TCAS Scanners, repair the product at Stoneridge’s discretion Stoneridge’s
obligation to satisfy a warranty claim as contemplated herein is subject to
the following conditions,

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 697

Stoneridge Warranty Statement (continued)

• All such claims must be submitted to Stoneridge no later than


ninety (90) days from the date of the failure occurrence, unless
otherwise agreed in writing with Stoneridge Electronics, and shall
be supported by satisfactory evidence in respect of the conditions
stated

• The product involved must be returned to Stoneridge Electronics


for examination. Stoneridge must be satisfied on examination of
the product that none of the Warranty Exclusions described herein
are applicable, and that said product was defective when originally
delivered to Purchaser or became defective due to a
manufacturing or design fault. In all cases, Stoneridge shall make
the final determination and interpretation as to the warrantability
of the Product. The repaired or replaced Product shall be
warranted hereunder for the unexpired portion of the original
warranty period

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 698
Stoneridge Warranty Statement (continued)

• Warranty Exclusions. Stoneridge Electronics warranty shall not


extend to any Product that has been subjected to the following,

• Accident, damage, negligence, abuse or misuse


• Improper installation or maintenance
• Abnormal operating conditions
• Alteration or modification including removal of factory seals
• A purpose or application in any way different from that for
which it was designed
• Normal wear is not warrantable

• Limitations on Reimbursement
Stoneridge’s liability is limited to replacing faulty product

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 699

Stoneridge Warranty Statement (continued)

• Warranty Period,
• Product Warranty Periods are stated below and commence
from the date of installation for vehicle products or the date
of purchase for products not installed within vehicles
• Claims Procedure,
• Warranty claims must be submitted through an Authorised
Stoneridge Electronics Distributor with an appropriately
completed Warranty Claim Form and a bench test chart or
drivers chart in the case of Tachograph returns
• Warranty Disclaimer,
• Stoneridge's Warranty is limited to replacement or repair of
the defective product and excludes liability for incidental,
special, consequential or any other damages, or loss of use
or damage to any other property arising from the use of
Stoneridge products. Nothing contained within this warranty
statement affects your statutory rights as a consumer

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 700
Warranty Periods

ƒ Tachographs manufactured by Stoneridge Electronics


• 8400 NEW 2 years, 8400 FRU 2 years
• 2400 NEW 2 Years, 2400 FRU 1 year

Tachograph warranty periods commence from the date of installation

ƒ Programmers & Simulators


• 1 Year from the date of purchase

ƒ Accessories
• 1 Year from the date of purchase

ƒ Products not manufactured by Stoneridge Electronics


• Manufacturers warranty periods apply

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 701

Warranty Periods (continued)

ƒ Warranty claims must be made within 90 Days following the date of failure
unless otherwise agreed with Stoneridge Electronics

ƒ Stoneridge Electronics endeavour to examine all warranty returns within 14


days of receipt at the factory

ƒ Written reports detailing the examination of any product returned under


warranty can be obtained by indicating that a report is required on the
Warranty Claim Form

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 702
Procedure for Warranty Claims

ƒ Tachographs
• Note the drivers complaint regarding the Tachograph and examine
any drivers charts provided for faults. Take a copy of faulty charts
if permitted by driver

• Check the Tachograph is within its warranty period

• Check the installation of the Tachograph in the vehicle

• Remove the Tachograph from the vehicle

• Visually inspect the Tachograph for damage or misuse

• Bench Test the Tachograph to check operation

• Examine the bench test charts for errors or faults


© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd
DD55309 Rev 05 703

Procedure for Warranty Claims (continued)

• If the Tachograph is found to be faulty, complete an R2


Warranty Claim Form and return the pink and blue copies with
the unit to Stoneridge Electronics. Do not use photocopies

• An individual R2 claim form must be used for each warranty


claim. Pads of R2 warranty claim forms are available from
Stoneridge Electronics

• All fields on the R2 Warranty Claim Form must be completed -


see example below

ƒ All Other Products


• Complete an R2 Warranty Claim Form with details of the
complaint and return with the unit to Stoneridge Electronics

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 704
R2 Warranty Return Form

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 705

Course End

© Stoneridge Electronics Ltd


DD55309 Rev 05 706

You might also like